Saturn 2007, 2007 Vue User manual

Saturn 2007, 2007 Vue User manual
2007 Saturn VUE Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 9
Rear Seats ............................................. 19
Safety Belts ............................................ 20
Child Restraints ...................................... 44
Airbag System ........................................ 75
Restraint System Check
......................... 94
Features and Controls ................................ 97
Keys ....................................................... 98
Doors and Locks .................................. 103
Windows ............................................... 107
Theft-Deterrent Systems
....................... 109
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 111
Mirrors .................................................. 127
M
OnStar® System ................................... 131
Storage Areas
...................................... 134
Sunroof
................................................ 137
Instrument Panel .......................................
Instrument Panel Overview ...................
Climate Controls ...................................
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
..........................................
Audio System(s) ...................................
139
142
156
161
184
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 231
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
..................................... 232
Towing
................................................. 270
1
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
Headlamp Aiming
.................................
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .....
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
Electrical System ..................................
Capacities and Specifications ................
2
285
287
289
294
328
331
338
339
370
379
380
387
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 389
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 390
Customer Assistance Information ............. 407
Customer Assistance and
Information ........................................ 408
Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 422
Index .......................................................... 425
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a
front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle so it will be there
if it is needed. If the vehicle is sold, leave this
manual in the vehicle.
SATURN, the SATURN Emblem, and the name
VUE are registered trademarks, of Saturn
Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS and GM are
registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to make
changes after that time without further notice.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15246947 A First Printing
©
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9
Manual Seats ................................................ 9
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ......................... 10
Power Seat ................................................. 10
Manual Lumbar ........................................... 11
Heated Seats .............................................. 11
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 12
Head Restraints .......................................... 15
Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 16
Rear Seats .................................................... 19
Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 19
Safety Belts .................................................. 20
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 25
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 26
Driver Position ............................................. 26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 35
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 36
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 36
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 37
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 40
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 43
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 43
Child Restraints ............................................ 44
Older Children ............................................. 44
Infants and Young Children ......................... 47
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 51
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 56
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 58
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position ...................... 64
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ....................... 67
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ......................... 69
7
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System .............................................. 75
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 78
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 81
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 83
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 83
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 84
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 86
8
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 92
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 93
Restraint System Check ............................... 94
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 94
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................... 95
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your
body to be sure the seat is locked in place.
9
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height
adjuster, it is located on the outboard side of the
seat near the front of the seat cushion. To raise
the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the
seat, move the lever downward repeatedly until
the seat is at the desired height.
If the vehicle has a power seat, the control used to
operate it is located on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat. To adjust the seat do any of the
following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the control up or down.
10
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of
the driver seat lower
cushion on the
inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the lumbar support.
Your vehicle may
have heated seats.
The switches are
located below the
climate control system
and forward of the
shift lever.
Press 1 to warm the seat. Press 2 for a higher
temperature setting. To turn this feature off, move
the switch to the center position.
11
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
12
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
To recline the seatback on the driver’s seat,
lift the lever on the rear outboard side of the seat
and move the seatback to the desired position.
Then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
To recline the seatback on the front passenger’s
seat, lift the lever, located on the outboard side
of the seat, up fully to disengage the seatback.
Then move the seatback to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
13
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety
beltscannot do their job when you are
reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
CAUTION:
14
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Head Restraints
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
15
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push
the restraint down.
Passenger Folding Seatback
The front passenger’s seatback folds flat.
{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry
longer objects, such as skis, be sure any
such cargo is not near an airbag. In a
crash, an inflating airbag might force that
object toward a person. This could cause
severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag
would inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on page 78 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 264.
16
{CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash. Remove or secure
all items before driving.
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat as far back as it
will go and release the bar. Try to move the
seat back and forth to make sure it is
locked into place.
3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard
side of the seat, up fully and fold the seatback
forward until it disengages.
17
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard
side of the seat, up fully and push up on the
seatback.
2. Continue raising the seatback until the
seatback re-engages.
{CAUTION:
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks
in the folded position.
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked in place.
The recliner lever is also used to recline the
seatback while a passenger is seated. See Manual
Reclining Seatbacks on page 12.
18
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
The rear split bench seatbacks have three
available positions — folded forward, upright, or
partially reclined. Each of the rear seatbacks
can be moved to any of the three positions
independent of the other seatback position.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed,
not properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
Prior to lowering the seatback, ensure all three of
the seatbelts are unbuckled and the front seats
are not reclined.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
19
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Lift the lever on the upper back corner of the
seatback to move it to the desired position and
then release it. Push and pull on the seatback to
be sure it is locked in place.
20
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 164
and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
on page 164.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is
why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can
be so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
21
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
22
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
23
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
24
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of
less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
25
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 44 or Infants and Young
Children on page 47. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
26
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 35.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
27
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
28
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
30
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
31
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt
goes over an armrest like this. The belt
would be much too high. In a crash, you
can slide under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied at the abdomen,
not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the
belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
32
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at
all times.
33
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
34
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it up or down without
squeezing the release buttons to make sure it has
locked into position.
35
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 26.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
36
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.
And they can strike others in the vehicle who
are wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
37
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
For the center rear position, if the belt stops
before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate
and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
For the outboard rear positions, when the
shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will
lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again.
38
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
39
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
40
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip, which
is behind the seatback. Pull the elastic cord
out from between the edge of the seatback
and the interior body.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.
The elastic cord must be under the belt.
Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert
the two edges of the belt into the slots of
the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
41
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 37. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Pull the guide upward to
expose its storage clip, and then slide the
guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward
and slide them in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
42
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if your
vehicle has side impact rollover airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts
in a side crash or a rollover event.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 95.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
43
Child Restraints
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
belts?
Older Children
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
44
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
45
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides on page 40. If the child is
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint that belts provide.
46
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to
the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
47
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
48
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
49
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
50
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across
the strongest part of an infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed.
A young child’s hip bones are still so
small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt
may not remain low on the hip bones, as
it should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that
is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
51
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant in
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
52
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
53
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed in
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt
or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle.
Child restraint systems must be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 58 for more information.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
54
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
55
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
CAUTION:
56
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off and
the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint
can move around in a collision or sudden stop
and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in your
vehicle — even when no child is in it.
57
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The following explains how to attach a child
restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle
and attachments on the child restraint that
are made for use with the LATCH system.
Lower Anchors
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer
will provide you with instructions on how to
use the child restraint and its attachments.
58
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
Some child restraints that have top tethers are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In
the United States, some child restraints also have
a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
59
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has exposed metal
anchors located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
The top tether anchors are located on the back of
the rear seatback. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
60
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 56 for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash.
A child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
61
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
62
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether around the
head restraint.
63
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, raise the
head restraint and route
the tether under the
head restraint and
in between the head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 58.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt
to secure the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child
restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
64
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
65
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and to Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 58.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
66
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 58.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt
to secure the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child
restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
67
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
68
4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach
and tighten the top tether to the top tether
anchor. Refer to the instructions that came
with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 58.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put
the Restraint on page 56.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing
infant seat or a small child in a forward-facing
child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 86 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 166
for more information on this including important
safety information.
69
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a label
on your sun visor that says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
70
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off and
the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
71
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
Seats on page 9.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 58.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 58 if
the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 86. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats
on page 9.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to RUN or START.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 166.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
72
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
73
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the
instrument panel will be lit and stay lit
when the key is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the
child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint.
ls
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
74
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle if
one is available and check with your retailer.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted side
impact airbags designed for either side impact or
rollover deployment. Roof-mounted side impact
airbags are available for the driver and the
passenger seated directly behind the driver and
for the right front passenger and the passenger
seated directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact
airbags, the words AIR BAG will appear on the
airbag covering on the ceiling near the driver’s and
right front passenger’s window.
Even if you have no right front passenger seat in
your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag
in the right side of the instrument panel. Do not
place cargo in front of this airbag.
{CAUTION:
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag.
In a crash, an inflating airbag might force
that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in
which an airbag would inflate. For more
information, see Where Are the Airbags?
on page 78 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 264.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
75
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side
crashes. And, for some unrestrained
CAUTION:
76
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Roof-mounted rollover airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle or during a vehicle rollover.
They may inflate in some frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rear
crashes. If your vehicle has roof-mounted
airbags, they are designed to provide
both side impact protection and
rollover protection. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and roof-mounted side impact
airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. If you are too close to
an inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 44 or Infants and Young Children
on page 47.
77
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 165 for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
78
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver and the person seated directly
behind the driver, it is in the ceiling above the
side windows.
79
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front passenger and the person
seated directly behind that passenger, it is in
the ceiling above the side windows.
80
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. And, if your vehicle
has roof-mounted side impact airbags,
never secure anything to the roof of your
vehicle by routing the rope or tie down
through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of
an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts,
these airbags inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full
deployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle
goes straight into a wall that does not move
or deform, the threshold level for the reduced
deployment is about 10 to 15 mph (16 to 24 km/h),
and the threshold level for a full deployment is
about 17 to 25 mph (27 to 40 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with
specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
81
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mounted
side impact airbags and a rollover sensor.
See Airbag System on page 75. These
roof-mounted “rollover capable” side impact
airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to
severe side crashes, and during a rollover.
They may also inflate in some frontal crashes.
Both rollover capable side impact airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed “threshold level.” The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate
in rear impacts.
82
Both side impact airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck. If your vehicle
does not have a right front passenger seat and a
rear seat, only the driver’s frontal airbag will
deploy in a frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what
the repair costs were. For frontal airbags,
inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how quickly the
vehicle slows down. For side impact airbags,
inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. Additionally, in the case of a “rollover
capable” roof-mounted side impact airbag, the
sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to
roll over. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact
the steering wheel or the instrument panel.
In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But the frontal airbags would not help you in
many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not help you
in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts.
For the frontal airbags, the inflator, airbag, and
related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger.
For vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags,
the airbag modules, the inflator, and the airbags
are located in the ceiling of the vehicle, near
the side windows.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicles
with roof-mounted rollover airbags.
83
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag
module may be hot for a short time. These
components include the steering wheel hub for the
driver’s frontal airbag and the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
For vehicles with side impact airbags, the ceiling
of your vehicle near the side windows may be hot.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
84
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior dome lamp
on, and flash the exterior lamps on and off when
the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors
again and turn the interior lamps off by using the
door lock and interior lamp controls. You must
first, however, turn your ignition key to the
following ignition switch positions:
1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
2. Turn the ignition key to RUN.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 417.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean
that the airbag system will not work properly.
See your retailer for service.
85
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
The passenger airbag status indicator on the
instrument panel will be visible when you turn your
ignition key to RUN or START.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 166. The
passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of the
passenger sensing system.
86
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat, and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, there is
a label on your sun visor that says, “Never put
a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great
if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
87
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off and
the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
CAUTION:
88
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the instrument panel will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position on page 69.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
89
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle if
one is available and check with your retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon
the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit,
it could be because that person is not sitting
90
properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the
vehicle off and ask the person to place the
seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for about two minutes. This will
allow the system to detect that person and then
enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something may
be wrong with the airbag system. If this
ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 165 for more on this, including
important safety information.
You may want to consider not using seat covers
or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle
has the passenger sensing system. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
on page 93.
The passenger sensing system may suppress the
airbag deployment when liquid is soaked into
the seat. If this happens, the off indicator in the
passenger airbag status indicator and the airbag
readiness light on the instrument panel will be
lit. The system should resume normal operation
after the seat is allowed to dry. If the system
operates incorrectly after the seat has dried,
have your retailer check the system.
{CAUTION:
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers,
can affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. Remove any additional material from
the seat cushion before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint and before a small occupant,
including a small adult, sits in the passenger
position.
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
91
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase
a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 423.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
92
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors.
If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 408.
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling and
pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbag
modules, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 408.
93
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 373
for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
94
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, or
the side impact airbag covering (if equipped) on
the ceiling near the side windows, the airbag
may not work properly. You may have to replace
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both
the airbag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s airbag, or side
impact airbag module and ceiling covering for
roof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped.)
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the person
using it, resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make sure your
restraint systems are working properly after
a crash, have them inspected and any
necessary replacements made as soon
as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash, then
you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have
LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or
replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary
even if the belt or LATCH system was not being
used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new
retractor assembly will be there to help protect you
in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or if
your airbag readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 165.
95
✍ NOTES
96
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys .............................................................. 98
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 99
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ............................................... 100
Doors and Locks ........................................ 103
Door Locks ................................................ 103
Power Door Locks ..................................... 104
Delayed Locking ........................................ 104
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 104
Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 105
Lockout Protection ..................................... 106
Liftgate ...................................................... 106
Windows ...................................................... 107
Power Windows ........................................ 108
Sun Visors ................................................ 108
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 109
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 109
Passlock® .................................................. 110
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 111
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 111
Ignition Positions ....................................... 111
Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) ................. 113
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 116
Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 118
Parking Brake ........................................... 121
Regenerative Braking ................................ 121
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 122
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 123
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 124
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 125
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 126
Mirrors ......................................................... 127
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display .............................. 127
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 130
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 130
OnStar® System .......................................... 131
Storage Areas ............................................. 134
Glove Box ................................................. 134
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 134
Floor Console Storage Area ...................... 135
Center Console Storage Area .................... 135
Garment Hooks ......................................... 135
Cargo Area ............................................... 135
Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 137
Sunroof ....................................................... 137
97
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows
will function with the keys in the ignition
and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
98
One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks.
Key code information can be obtained only at the
retailer where your vehicle was purchased.
These code numbers can be used to make new
keys. Additional keys that are needed can be
made at any retail service facility provided
you have the key code information. Store this
information in a safe place, but not in your vehicle.
Have extra keys made. Your service parts
department can make extra keys for you.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The remote keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
99
At times you may notice a decrease in range.
This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you
have to stand closer to your vehicle for the
transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 100.
• If you are still having trouble, see your
Saturn retailer or authorized service provider
for service.
100
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the
doors from about 32 feet (10 m) away using the
remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
your vehicle.
Q (Lock): Press this
button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter
to lock the doors.
This also arms the
content theft-deterrent
system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on
page 109 for information
on arming the content
theft-deterrent system.
Your vehicle can be programmed so that the
parking lamps or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
will flash and/or the horn will sound when you
lock the doors with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See your retailer for more information
on programming this feature.
" (Unlock): Press this button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s
door. This also disarms the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 109
for information on disarming the content
theft-deterrent system. Press the button again
within 5 seconds to unlock the rest of the doors.
Your vehicle can be programmed so that the
parking lamps or DRL will flash and/or the horn will
sound when you unlock the doors with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See your retailer for more
information on programming this feature.
L (Panic Alarm): Press the button with the horn
symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn
will sound and the parking lamps or DRL and
dome lamp will flash for up to two minutes.
To stop the panic alarm, press this button again.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking
your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased through your
retailer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your retailer.
When the retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters must also be matched. Once your
retailer has coded the new transmitter, the
lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote
keyless entry transmitter should last about
four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter
will not work at the normal range in any location.
If you have to get close to your vehicle before
the transmitter works, it is probably time to change
the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the
transmitter.
101
Resynchronization
This is used to keep the transmitter of the vehicle
communicating with the receiver of the vehicle.
Resynchronization may be required due to
the security method used by this system.
Your vehicle has an automatic resynchronization
function built into the system. If your transmitter is
not working properly and you have to manually
resynchronize, press the lock and unlock buttons at
the same time for seven seconds while you are
near your vehicle. The doors will lock or unlock,
depending on their starting position. If they do not,
contact your retailer for service.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a
pencil or similar object to remove the old
battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions
under the cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to
be sure no moisture can enter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing
your transmitter with your receiver. See
“Resynchronization” for more information.
102
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s door
lock counterclockwise to lock the door and
clockwise to unlock it or use the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
From the inside, move the manual lock control on
the door or use the power door lock switch.
103
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s doors.
Press the bottom of the
switch to lock all doors.
Press the top of the
switch to unlock
all doors.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle,
three chimes will sound signaling that the delayed
locking feature is active. Five seconds after the
last door is closed, all of the doors will lock.
To cancel the delay and lock the doors
immediately, press the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or the power door
lock switch a second time. The theft deterrent
system will arm after 30 seconds.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Automatic Locking
Delayed Locking
This feature will delay the actual locking of the
doors and arming of the theft-deterrent system for
five seconds when the power door lock switch
or remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock
the vehicle.
104
Your vehicle has a locking feature that will
automatically lock all the doors and liftgate when
the ignition is in RUN and the shift lever is
moved out of PARK (P).
All doors must be closed. The automatic locking
feature cannot be disabled.
All doors will automatically lock again when the
brake pedal is applied, a door is opened and then
closed, and the brake pedal is released.
Programmable Automatic Unlocking
All the doors and liftgate will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).
The unlocking feature can be programmed on or off
by turning the ignition to RUN, engine not running,
and pressing the unlock part of the power door lock
switch for eight seconds. The horn will chirp once
when this feature is on and twice when it is off.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors
from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
To set the rear door security locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the lock and turn it
counterclockwise (left) for the driver’s side and
clockwise (right) for the passenger’s side.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the power door lock
switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the lock and turn it
clockwise (right) for the driver’s side
and counterclockwise (left) for the
passenger’s side.
105
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the
key is in the ignition and any door is open, all
the doors will lock and then the driver’s door will
unlock. Be sure to remove the key from the ignition
when locking your vehicle.
If the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
lock the doors while the key is in the ignition,
a chime will sound three times. All doors will
then lock.
Liftgate
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
CAUTION:
106
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
unconsciousness and even death. If you
must drive with the liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that will
force outside air into your vehicle. See
Climate Control System on page 156.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the
way. See Engine Exhaust on page 125.
Use your remote keyless entry transmitter or
power door lock switches to unlock the liftgate.
To open the liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the liftgate.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
107
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The window switches
are located on each
side of the shift lever on
the center console.
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that is labeled AUTO. This allows the
driver’s window to open fully without having to
continuously press the switch. Press the switch to
the second position and the driver’s window will go
all the way down. To stop the window from
lowering, lift the switch all the way up and release it.
Window Lockout
To lower a window, press the switch down.
To raise a window, pull the switch up.
The driver’s window switches also include a lockout
switch. Press the left side of the switch to prevent
rear passengers from using their window switches.
The driver can still control all the windows with the
lockout on. Press the right side of the window
lockout switch to return to normal window
operation.
The power windows operate when the ignition is in
RUN or ACC.
Sun Visors
A window switch is also located on each rear
door. Press the bottom of the switch to lower the
window. Press the top of the switch to raise
the window.
To block out glare swing the visors down or to the
side. The driver’s sun visor can be detached
from the center mount and slid along the rod to
block different areas of the front window.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors.
108
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Security System Disable: The system will
not arm.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
To change the mode that your vehicle is
programmed to, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
Content Theft-Deterrent
The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
arm/disarm the theft-deterrent system. Your
vehicle’s theft-deterrent system can be
programmed to three different modes.
Active Arming: The system will arm when the
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed. The system will disarm when the
unlock button is pressed.
Passive Arming: The system will arm itself
one minute after the ignition is turned off and the
driver’s door has been opened and closed.
If the lock button on the transmitter is pressed
before the minute has passed, the system will arm
immediately. The system will disarm when the
unlock button is pressed.
2. Press the panic alarm button on the
transmitter slowly four times within
five seconds.
3. You must complete one of the following within
three seconds to change the mode.
• To select the active arming mode, press the
lock button on the transmitter.
• To select the passive arming mode, press
the lock button on the transmitter twice
within 3 seconds.
• To select the security system disable mode,
press the unlock button on the transmitter.
A chime will sound once the mode has been
selected.
109
If you accidentally set off the alarm when
entering/exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off by
pressing any button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter other than the panic alarm button.
If you hear three horn chirps when you press
the unlock button on the transmitter, that means
the vehicle’s alarm was triggered while you
were away.
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock® theft-deterrent system.
This light will come on
for the theft-deterent
system.
110
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder
is turned with a valid key. If a correct key is
not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered
with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the security light will go
off approximately five seconds after the key is
turned to RUN following an engine start.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying
to restart the engine. Remember to release the key
from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the security light
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine
if you turn the engine off. However, your
Passlock® system is not working properly and
must be serviced by your retailer. Your vehicle is
not protected by Passlock® at this time. You may
also want to check the fuses, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 380. See your retailer for
service. Also, see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 413 for more information.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 274 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the
ignition switch, you can
turn it to four different
positions. A warning
tone will sound if
you open the driver’s
door when the key
has not been removed
from the ignition.
9 (LOCK): This position locks your steering
column. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK
unless the shift lever is in PARK (P).
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left and
right while you turn the key hard. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
111
ACC (Accessory): This position operates some
of your electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns
to after you start your engine and release the
switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine
is running. But even when the ignition is not
running, you can use RUN to operate your
electrical accessories and to display some warning
and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACC or RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
/ (START): This position starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition switch will return to RUN for
normal driving.
112
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop)
Place the transaxle in the proper gear.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position — this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the
vehicle moving could damage the transaxle.
Shift into PARK (P) only when your vehicle is
stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
down as your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transaxle gently
to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists
in starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is turned to the
START position, and then released when
the engine begins cranking, the engine
will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for
many seconds, cranking stops after
15 seconds to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear damage, this system
also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC or LOCK position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down.
113
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key in START for up to
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and
accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat the procedure.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transaxle
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your retailer. If you do not, your engine might
not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
114
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
{CAUTION:
There is something about your vehicle
that can make it move suddenly, and you
or others can be seriously injured.
This can happen if the vehicle is in the
Auto Stop mode, and the shift lever is in
DRIVE (D). Because your vehicle has the
Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature, your
vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut off
when you come to a complete stop.
However, if you then start to exit the
vehicle, as soon as you take your foot off
the brake pedal, the engine will start again
and the vehicle can move forward. If you
are going to exit your vehicle, first shift to
PARK (P) and turn the ignition to LOCK.
Then exit.
Your vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop
feature which is a hybrid fuel-saving operation.
After the engine is started and has reached
operating temperature, the AUTO STOP feature
may cause the engine to turn off when you apply
the brakes and come to a complete stop. When you
take your foot off the brake pedal or press the
accelerator pedal, the engine will start. The engine
will continue to run until the next AUTO STOP.
The AUTO STOP mark on the tachometer signifies
that the engine is in AUTO STOP mode. After
parking and then turning off the vehicle, the
tachometer needle will move to OFF. If the driver’s
door is opened while in AUTO STOP mode, a
chime will sound.
If you are on an incline, your vehicle may roll
backwards a short distance until the engine
performs an AUTO START. The Hill Start Assist
feature will help start the vehicle on a moderate or
steep incline. See Hill Start Assist Light on
page 183 for more information. To restart the
engine during the AUTO STOP, release the brake
pedal or press the accelerator pedal. The engine
starts immediately. The vehicle continues to
run until the next stop.
The Engine Will Remain Running When:
• The engine, transaxle, or hybrid battery is
•
•
•
•
•
not warmed up yet.
The outside temperature is high — usually
above 95°F (35°C) and the climate control
system is working to cool the vehicle in
A/C mode (yellow light illuminated on A/C
button) or if defrost is selected. See Climate
Control System on page 156 for more
information.
The shift lever is in PARK (P), NEUTRAL (N),
REVERSE (R), INTERMEDIATE (I) or
LOW (L).
The hybrid battery pack charge is low.
The 12V vehicle battery charge is low, or
loads are high.
The hood is not fully closed.
There are several conditions which may prevent
an AUTO STOP or cause an AUTO START.
115
The Engine Will Restart When:
• The brake pedal is released.
• The accelerator pedal is applied.
• When shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), the engine will restart after
3.5 seconds.
• When shifting from DRIVE (D) to
INTERMEDIATE (I), LOW (L) or
REVERSE (R) the engine will restart
immediately.
• If the A/C button (green light illuminated
on A/C) button is selected, the duration of the
AUTO STOP will depend on the outside
temperature. This economy mode improves
fuel economy by limiting the effects of the
air conditioning. The warmer it is outside,
the shorter the time before the engine
is restarted to provide cabin cooling.
• The climate control system is turned from
Off to On (econ or normal A/C, or
floor/defog/defrost). See Climate Control
System on page 156 for more information.
116
• The engine is required to run for either
heater or climate control performance.
See “Air Conditioning and Engine Start/Stop”
under Climate Control System on page 156
for more information.
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low and
requires recharging.
• Auto Stop time is greater than two minutes.
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold
weather 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant
heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged
in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of
the coolant heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The cord is located near the air
cleaner assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
retailer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The retailer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
117
Automatic Transaxle Operation
The shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
There are several
different positions for
the automatic transaxle.
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start
the engine because your vehicle cannot
move easily.
118
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 122.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 274.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system.
You have to fully apply the regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before shifting
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the
way into PARK (P) while maintaining brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 123.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after
your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 261.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine
is running at high speed is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
high speed may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at
high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
119
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transaxle. It provides the best fuel
economy for your vehicle. If you need more power
for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
under Loss of Control on page 246.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used
for normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle
speed without using your brakes for slight
downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to steepness of grade. If constant
upshifting or downshifting occurs while driving
up steep hills, this position can be used to prevent
repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) when
driving on hilly, winding roads and when towing a
trailer, so that there is less shifting between gears.
120
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually
using your brakes. You can use it on very steep
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever
is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift into
LOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.
If you are stuck, do not spin the tires.
When stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or
parking brake to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
Make sure to release the parking brake before
driving the vehicle.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
Regenerative Braking
The parking brake lever is located to the right of
the driver’s seat.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the
ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in
as you move the brake lever all the way down.
Your vehicle has a regenerative braking system.
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy
from the moving vehicle and turns it back
into electrical energy. This energy is then stored
back into the vehicle’s hybrid battery system,
contributing to increased fuel efficiency.
The system works whenever you take your foot
off the accelerator pedal while your vehicle is
moving in DRIVE (D), INTERMEDIATE (I) or,
LOW (L) gear. This causes your vehicle to slow
down slightly faster. It may feel like the brake
pedal is being pressed, even when it is not.
121
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 274.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the
parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding
the button on the shift lever and pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and your parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever
away from PARK (P) without first pushing the
button. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
122
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park (P) on page 122.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) before you release the
parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transaxle, then you will be able to pull
the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 118.
To shift out of PARK (P):
1. Apply the regular brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press
the shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from
PARK (P), consult your dealer.
Shift Interlock By-Pass
Use the following steps, if for some reason the
shifter is not released when you apply the brake,
or if service or towing requires the car to be
shifted out of PARK (P) without running the engine.
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to the ACC (Accessory)
position. See Ignition Positions on page 111
for more information.
3. Then, move the shift lever into NEUTRAL (N).
The vehicle can now be started normally.
123
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
124
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
(Continued)
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system
has been modified improperly.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
125
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 125.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 257.
126
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 122.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 274.
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
When on, an automatic dimming mirror
automatically dims to the proper level to minimize
glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the
upper right corner of the mirror face. The compass
reading and the outside temperature will both
appear in the display at the same time.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
automatically each time the ignition is started.
To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the
following:
1. Make sure the indicator light, located to the
left of the on/off button, is on. If it’s not,
press and hold the on/off button until the light
comes on, indicating that the mirror is in
automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function
by pressing and holding the on/off button until
the indicator light turns off.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
127
Temperature and Compass Display
Compass Calibration
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly
to turn the comp/temp display on or off.
The compass may need calibration from time
to time.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to
be calibrated. See the information following
on calibration.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
push in the on/off button for approximately
nine seconds or until CAL is displayed.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button until either a
flashing °F or °C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display
to the desired unit of measurement. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity, the
new unit will be locked in and the display
will return.
128
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until
the display reads a direction, or the word CAL
disappears.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if you live
outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will
be necessary to adjust for compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, your
compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the following zone map.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the
desired zone number appears in the display.
Release the button. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new zone
number will be locked in and the comp/temp
display will return.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
129
Outside Power Mirrors
The outside power
mirror controls are
located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle
next to the shift lever.
Move the selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror to be adjusted; then press the
four-way control pad to adjust the direction of
the mirror.
130
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
seen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things
appear farther away than they really are.
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may
cancel your OnStar® service at any time by
contacting OnStar® as provided below. A complete
OnStar® Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms
and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,
contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or
press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is
included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.
For more information, press the OnStar® button
to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar®.
131
Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
132
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used
with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®
Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
Owners Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 227 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
How OnStar® Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
133
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®
equipment is active.
134
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull the lever to the left.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has a removable cupholder liner and
cupholder located inside the center console
storage area. To access, pull the cover towards
the rear of the vehicle. To remove the liner, pull it
out of the cupholder. To replace, push the liner
back in. To remove the cupholder, push the tab in
near the passenger’s seat and pull straight up.
To replace, slide the two tabs at the rear of
the cupholder into the slots at the rear of the
center console and push the cupholder gently into
place. There is additional storage underneath
the cupholders. There are two more cupholders
located at rear of the center console. Push the
button to access.
Floor Console Storage Area
Cargo Area
Your vehicle may have a floor console storage
area. Push the button to open.
Your vehicle has a cargo area organizer, which is
located in the rear of the vehicle. This storage
space is designed to hold small items and includes
integrated storage bins.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a center console storage area.
To access, slide the cover back towards the rear of
the vehicle. It is equipped with two accessory
power outlets. One is located inside the storage
area and another hidden under the cupholders.
There is a hole in the storage area for a cellphone
wire to be routed through.
Use the following procedure to access and
assemble the rear cargo organizer.
Garment Hooks
Your vehicle has four garment hooks. They are
located in the rear of the vehicle.
1. Pull up on the latch of the rear panel lid of the
cargo organizer to open it.
2. Lift the front of the cargo organizer and fold
out the end panels.
135
3. Turn the end panels forward and snap them
into the rear panel lid.
4. Pull the center divider out from the rear
panel lid.
136
5. Turn the center divider rearward and snap it
into the panel lid.
6. Reverse the above steps to stow the dividers
and close the cargo organizer.
Push firmly on the rear panel lid to engage
the latch of the organizer.
Cargo Tie Downs
Your vehicle has four cargo tie-downs. They are
located in the rear of the vehicle and can be used
for securing cargo.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the controls to
operate it are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUN
or ACC to operate the sunroof. See Ignition
Positions on page 111.
To stop the sunroof before it is completely open,
press the switch rearward again. The sunshade
cannot be closed with the sunroof open. To close
the sunroof, press forward on the switch until it
stops. The sunshade must be manually closed.
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down
on the front of the switch. Push up on the front
of the switch to close it. The sunshade must
be manually opened and closed when the sunroof
is in the vent position.
To express-open the
sunroof glass panel and
sunshade, press the
switch rearward
and release it.
137
✍ NOTES
138
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 142
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 144
Horn .......................................................... 144
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 144
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 145
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 145
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 146
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 146
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 146
Windshield Washer .................................... 147
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 148
Cruise Control ........................................... 148
Headlamps ................................................ 151
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 152
Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 153
Interior Lamps ........................................... 153
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 153
Dome Lamp .............................................. 154
Entry Lighting ............................................ 154
Map Lamps ............................................... 154
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 154
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 154
Cigarette Lighter ........................................ 155
Climate Controls ......................................... 156
Climate Control System ............................. 156
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 161
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 162
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 163
Trip Odometer ........................................... 163
Tachometer ............................................... 163
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 164
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 164
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 165
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 166
Battery Warning Light ................................ 168
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 169
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 170
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ........................................ 171
Low Traction Light ..................................... 171
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light ...................................................... 172
Low Coolant Warning Light ....................... 172
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 173
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 176
139
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Change Engine Oil Light ........................... 177
Security Light ............................................ 177
Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 178
Highbeam On Light ................................... 178
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light ........................................ 179
Gate Ajar Light .......................................... 179
Fuel Gage ................................................. 180
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 181
Auto Stop Mode ........................................ 181
Charge/Assist Gage ................................... 182
Fuel Economy Light .................................. 183
Hill Start Assist Light ................................. 183
Hood Ajar Light ......................................... 184
140
Audio System(s) ......................................... 184
Setting the Time (Without Date Display) ....... 186
Setting the Time (With Date Display) ........... 186
Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 188
Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 195
Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 205
Using an MP3 ........................................... 205
XM Radio Messages ................................. 212
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 214
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 227
Radio Reception ........................................ 228
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 229
Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 229
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 229
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 229
✍ NOTES
141
Instrument Panel Overview
142
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Climate Control System on
page 156.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 145.
C. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control
on page 148.
D. Horn. See Horn on page 144.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 162.
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 227.
G. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield
Wipers on page 146.
H. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 153.
I. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 144.
J. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 166.
K. Traction Control System Button. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 240.
L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 184.
M. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 295.
N. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 144.
O. Power Mirror Control. See Outside Power
Mirrors on page 130.
P. Power Window Switches. See Power Windows
on page 108.
Q. Automatic Transaxle Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 118.
R. Heated Seats Buttons. See Heated Seats on
page 11.
S. Climate Control. See Climate Control System
on page 156.
T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 134.
143
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the
police and others that you have a problem.
The front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to
adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can
raise it to the highest level to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
The lever that allows
you to tilt the steering
wheel is located on
the left side of the
steering column.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals do not work.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
144
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and push the
lever down. Then, move the wheel to a
comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly
to lock the column in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has one upward (for right) and
one downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• GTurn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn
and Lane-Change Signals on page 145.
• OExterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps on
page 151.
• 2Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
on page 146.
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 146.
• AUTO Automatic Headlamps. See Automatic
Headlamp System on page 153.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete the lane change. The lever will return
by itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the
arrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 380 and for burned-out bulbs.
145
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to
high or high beam to low, pull the turn signal lever
all the way towards you. Then release it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If the wiper blades are
frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thaw
them. If the blades do become damaged, install
new blades or blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 338.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools
down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an
overload.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
To flash the high beams from low beam, pull the
turn signal/multifunction lever all the way
towards you. Then release it.
United States
146
turn the band with the arrow pointing to the
numbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for the most frequent
movement; select 1 for the least frequent.
LO or OO (Low): Move the lever to this position
for slow, steady wiping cycles.
HI or OOOO (High): Move the lever to this
position for rapid wiping cycles.
Windshield Washer
Canada
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers. Push up or
pull down on the lever to place it in one of the
following positions.
MIST or 8 (Mist): Pull the lever down and
release it for a single wiping cycle. The lever will
return to its original position. For more cycles, hold
the lever down before releasing it.
OFF or 9 (Off): Move the lever to this position
to turn off the wipers.
INT or & (Intermittent): Move the lever to this
position to set a delay between wipes. To set
for a shorter or longer delay between wipes,
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to
operate the windshield wipers. Washer fluid will
squirt onto the windshield and the wipers will
run for a few cycles to clear the windshield.
For more wash cycles, pull the lever toward you
and hold it there.
147
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control
The band on the wiper lever with the smaller
arrow operates the rear wiper/washer.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
9 (Off): Turn the band to this position to turn off
the rear wiper.
Z (Rear Wiper): Turn the band with the smaller
arrow to this position to turn on the rear wiper.
To set for a shorter or longer delay between wipes,
turn the other band with the larger arrow pointing
to the numbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for the
most frequent movement; select 1 for the least
frequent. The band with the arrow pointing to the
numbers (1, 2, or 3) will affect both the front
and rear wipers if they are on at the same time.
Y (Wash): Turn and hold the band in this position
to spray washer fluid on the rear window.
The rear wiper will also come on. Release the
band when enough fluid has been sprayed on the
window. The rear wiper will run a few additional
times after you release it.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle
as the windshield washer. However, the rear
window washer will run out of fluid before the
windshield washer. If you can wash your windshield
but not your rear window, check the fluid level.
148
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise
Setting Cruise Control
control system on and off. There is a indicator light
on the button that will come on when cruise
control is active.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do
not want to. You could be startled and
even lose control. Keep the cruise control
switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
The cruise control
buttons are located on
the steering wheel.
RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume a
set speed and to accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed and
to decrease the speed.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise
control.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press the on/off symbol to turn cruise control
on. The indicator light on the button will
come on.
2. Get to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET− button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
149
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brakes. This will
disengage the cruise control. The indicator light on
the cruise control button will go out when the
cruise is no longer engaged. To return to the
previously set speed, press the RES+ button
briefly when the vehicle has reached a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
This will take you back up to your previously
selected speed and stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• Disengage the cruise control, but do not
turn it off.
• If the cruise control system is already
engaged, press the RES+ button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the button. To increase your
speed in very small amounts, press the
RES+ button briefly and then release it.
Each time you do this, the vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
150
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push and hold the SET− button until you reach
the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET− button briefly. Each time you do this, you
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills
depends upon your speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you may have to step on the accelerator pedal
to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Of
course, applying the brakes ends cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to disengage the cruise
control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal or clutch; when
cruise control disengages, the indicator light
on the cruise control button will go out.
• Press the on/off button, this will turn off the
cruise control system.
• Press the cancel button.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the
ignition, your cruise control set speed memory
is erased.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control has the following three
positions:
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this
position to put the headlamps in automatic mode.
AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps on
and off depending upon how much light is
available outside of the vehicle.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
position to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
53 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control
with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
Lamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off
and the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
151
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your low-beam
headlamps come on at a reduced brightness in
daylight when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on,
• the exterior lamp band is in AUTO,
• the transaxle is not in PARK (P),
• the light sensor determines it is daytime, and
• the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps
will be on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps will not be on.
The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When you turn the exterior lamp band to
the headlamp position, your regular headlamps
will come on. The other lamps that come on with
your headlamps will also come on.
When you turn off the headlamps, the regular
lamps will go off, and your low-beam headlamps
will come on to the reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the
shift lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off
until you move the shift lever out of PARK (P).
To override the DRL on manual transaxle vehicles,
you must set the parking brake while the ignition
is off and then start your vehicle. The DRL will stay
off until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
152
Automatic Headlamp System
Instrument Panel Brightness
When it is dark enough outside, the headlamps
will come on automatically.
This feature controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
Your vehicle has a light
sensor located on top of
the instrument panel.
Make sure it is not
covered, or the
headlamps will be on
when you don’t
need them.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
center of the instrument
panel.
Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten the
lights or to the left to dim them.
Interior Lamps
The liftgate lamps are located on the bottom left
and right corner of the liftgate. They will come
on when the liftgate or any door is opened. The
liftgate lamps can be controlled by the dome lamp
switch. See Dome Lamp on page 154.
153
Dome Lamp
Map Lamps
The dome lamp switch has three positions.
The lamps are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. To turn the lamps on, press
the lens. Press the lens again to turn them off.
* (Off): The lamp will not come on as long as
the switch is in this position.
1 (Automatic): The lamp will come on when a
door is opened. See Entry Lighting on page 154.
+ (On): The lamp will stay on as long as
the switch is in this position.
Entry Lighting
If the dome lamp is in the automatic position,
the lamps inside your vehicle will come on when
any door is opened. In addition, the lights will
come on when the remote keyless entry unlock
button is pressed. It will stay on for 20 seconds
or until a door is opened. After the door is
opened the lights will remain on and stay on for
20 seconds after the doors are closed, or until you
put the key in the ignition and turn the key to
RUN. The lights will then gradually dim until it is
no longer lit.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver
feature designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the
ignition is turned off, the battery rundown
protection system will automatically turn the lamp
off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining
the battery.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to
connect electrical equipment such as a cellular
phone or CB radio.
The accessory power outlets are located on the
instrument panel near the climate controls, on the
rear of the center console, and also inside the
console under the cupholders.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
154
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
turn off electrical equipment when not in use
and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the
maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your retailer for
additional information on the accessory power
outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Check with your retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have a cigarette lighter. To use
the lighter, located on the instrument panel below
the climate controls, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away
from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle.
Never put flammable items in the ashtray.
155
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air to the
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets.
Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets with some air directed to the
windshield.
When the floor mode is selected, the system will
turn recirculation mode off and run the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside air is
at or below freezing. Entering this mode may
force the engine into the start/stop mode. See “Air
Conditioning and Engine Start/Stop” later in this
section. Recirculation mode cannot be selected
while in floor mode. This helps prevent window
fogging and moisture building up within the cabin.
Operation
To change the current mode, use the right knob to
select one of the following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
156
The right knob can also be used to select defog
or defrost mode. See “Defogging and Defrosting”
later in this section.
A (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise to increase
the fan speed or counterclockwise to decrease
the fan speed. To turn the fan off, turn the left knob
all the way counterclockwise. In any setting
other than off, the fan will run continuously with
the ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run
the air conditioning compressor. There will be
some airflow noticeable from the various outlets
when driving, even with the fan in the off position.
This is to ensure some fresh air is always
available in the vehicle. Turning the fan from off to
on may force the engine into the start/stop mode.
See “Air Conditioning and Engine Start/Stop”
later in this section.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.
@ (Recirculate): Press this button to toggle
between recirculate and outside air modes.
The indicator light turns on when the recirculate
mode is selected. This mode can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering your
vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside
your vehicle more quickly. Avoid using the
recirculate mode during high periods of humidity
or cool outside temperatures since this may result
in increased window fogging. If window fogging
is experienced, select the defrost mode.
Recirculation mode is not available in floor, defog,
or defrost modes and will shut off automatically
and change to outside air until a mode other than
floor, defog, or defrost is selected. This helps
prevent window fogging and moisture building up
within the cabin.
157
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
change the air conditioning mode between
economy, normal, and off. When this button is
pressed the indicator light will change with each
mode. The green indicator light comes on
when economy mode is selected. The yellow
indicator light comes on when normal mode
is selected. Turning the air conditioning on may
force the engine into the start/stop mode. See “Air
Conditioning and Engine Start/Stop” later in this
section. Air conditioning can be selected in
any mode as long as the fan is on.
On hot days, activate the air conditioning system,
select maximum fan speed and the coldest
temperature setting. Open the windows long
enough to let the hot inside air escape, then close
them. This helps reduce the time it takes for the
vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently. Adjust fan speed and
temperature setting as required to achieve comfort.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a
small amount of water dripping underneath the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
158
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two
modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield
and side windows. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove
fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs air to the
windshield, side window outlets, and floor outlets.
When this mode is selected, the system will
turn the recirculation mode off and run the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside air is
at or below freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in defog mode.
This helps prevent window fogging and moisture
building up within the cabin. To defog the windows
faster, turn the temperature knob clockwise to
the warmest setting. Using the defog mode may
force the engine into the start/stop mode. See “Air
Conditioning and Engine Start/Stop” later in this
section.
Rear Window Defogger
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air
to turn the rear window defogger on or off.
An indicator light above the button will come on to
show that the rear window defogger is activated.
to the windshield, with some air directed to
the side window outlets and the floor outlets.
When you select this mode, the system will turn
recirculation mode off automatically and will run the
air conditioning compressor unless the outside
air is at or below freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in defrost mode.
This helps prevent window fogging and moisture
building up within the cabin. To defrost the
windows faster, turn the temperature knob
clockwise to the warmest setting. Using the defrost
mode may force the engine into the start/stop
mode. See “Air Conditioning and Engine
Start/Stop” later in this section.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press the button
The rear window defogger will stay on for
approximately 15 minutes after the button is
pressed, unless the ignition is turned to ACC or
LOCK. If turned on again, the defogger will
only run for approximately seven minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off
by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal
or anything similar to the defogger grid.
159
Air Conditioning and Engine Start/Stop
The climate control system might cause the
engine to keep running while the vehicle is at
a complete stop or it might restart the engine
during an auto stop. In cold weather, the
climate control system uses the automatic engine
start/stop feature to maintain heater and
defogging performance in all air flow modes.
160
Economy Mode: Press the #button once to
select the economy mode. A green light will
appear. When this mode is selected, the climate
control system allows almost all automatic
engine start/stop operations, except in defrost
mode. If the economy mode is selected while
the engine is off, the engine will start while
the vehicle determines the climate control needs.
If the system determines that it is necessary to
turn on the air conditioning compressor to cool the
inside of the vehicle or dehumidify the air, the
automatic engine start/stop feature might still be
enabled.
Normal Mode: Press the #button, when a
yellow indicator light appears, the normal mode
is selected. In this mode or the defrost mode,
the climate control system prevents all automatic
engine start/stop operations. This is for the
best comfort and defrost performance. For
maximum engine off time, select the vent or
bi-level modes with the air conditioner turned off.
This will prevent the system from overriding
the automatic engine start/stop feature. Setting
the fan to the off position will also prevent
automatic engine start/stop.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Often gages and warning lights work together to
let you know when there is a problem with
your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on as you are driving, or when one of
the gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about it.
Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights and
gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As you will see in the details on the next
few pages, some warning lights come on briefly
when you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
161
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will
know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to
know to drive safely and economically.
United States cluster, Canada similar
162
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per
hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles or kilometers.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the mileage total of the
old odometer. If this not possible, it will be set
at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door
to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed. If the mileage is unknown,
the label should then indicate “previous mileage
unknown”.
Trip Odometer
Your trip odometer is located on the instrument
panel and shows how far your vehicle has
been driven since the trip odometer was last reset.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and
hold the trip/reset button on the speedometer for
about two seconds. Press the trip/reset button
to switch between the trip odometer and odometer.
The trip/reset button can also be used to turn the
fuel economy light off and on. For more information
see Fuel Economy Light on page 183.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
U.S. shown,
Canada similar
Your vehicle has auto stop and the indicator for
this is on the tachometer. For more information see
Auto Stop Mode on page 181.
163
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will be provided for several seconds
to remind people to buckle their safety belts.
The driver safety belt light will also be provided
and stay on for several seconds, then it will
flash for several more. You should buckle your
seat belt.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled
and the vehicle
is in motion.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag
is enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 86 for more information. The passenger
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor
the light will be provided.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
164
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag
symbol. The system checks the airbag’s
electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells
you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on
the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 75.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly.
The airbags in your vehicle may not
inflate in a crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to
RUN. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is
a problem.
165
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
166
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off and
the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
167
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 86 for more on this,
including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right
front passenger seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 165.
168
Battery Warning Light
The battery warning
light will come on briefly
as a check, when you
turn on the ignition.
Then it should go out
when the engine is
started.
If the light does not come on when you start your
vehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away.
This condition may indicate your battery warning
light is not functioning properly.
If the battery warning light comes on while you are
driving, this indicates that there is a problem
with the battery or the charging system of the
vehicle. If the light remains on, be sure to turn off
accessories such as the radio and climate control
system. Have your vehicle serviced right away.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the brake system warning light comes on,
there is a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
A chime will also sound if the parking brake is not
fully released and the vehicle is moving. If it stays
on after your parking brake is fully released,
it means you have a brake problem.
The brake light will also come on to indicate a low
brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 318 for
more information.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light
is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 270.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The brake light is located in the instrument panel
cluster.
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake light will come on
when you set your parking brake. The light will
stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
169
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning light
will come on briefly, as a check, when you
start your vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle
serviced so that the light works properly when
it needs to.
If the light stays on after
you start your engine, or
comes on and stays
on while you are driving,
try resetting the system.
To reset the system, do the following:
1. If you are driving, pull over when it is safe
to do so.
2. Be sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition.
4. Then restart the engine.
170
If the light remains on after resetting the system or
comes on again while driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the ABS light is on, but the
regular brake system warning light is not on, the
anti-lock brakes are not working properly, but
the regular brakes are still functioning. Have your
vehicle serviced right away. If both brake lights
are on, you do not have anti-lock brakes, and there
is a problem with your regular brakes as well.
Have your vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 270.
The ABS warning light should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
The Traction Control
System (TCS) warning
light may come on
for the following
reasons:
• Turning the system off by pressing the traction
control button located on the instrument panel
above the audio system. The warning light
will come on and stay on. To turn the system
back on, press the button again. The warning
light should go off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 240 for more
information.
• If there is an engine-related and brake system
problem that is specifically related to traction
control, the TCS will turn off and the
warning light will come on.
Low Traction Light
This light will come on
when the system is
limiting wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal. The roads may be slippery if this
light comes on. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after
the system stops limiting wheel spin. This light
should also come on for a few seconds when
you start your vehicle. If it does not, have
your vehicle serviced.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on
for an extended period of time when the system is
turned on, your vehicle needs service.
171
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on when
the engine has
overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and see Engine
Overheating on page 309 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on could cause your
vehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 309. Your vehicle could be damaged,
and it might not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on.
This light will come on and flash when the
temperature of the automatic transaxle fluid is too
high. If this happens you should pull over, shift
into PARK (P) and let the engine idle until the light
goes out.
This light will also come on briefly when starting your
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
172
Low Coolant Warning Light
This light comes on
briefly when you turn
your ignition on.
If this light comes on and stays on, the coolant
level in your vehicle is low. If the light is on along
with an overheat warning, you may have a
serious overheating problem.
Notice: Driving with the low coolant warning
light on could cause your vehicle to overheat.
See “Engine Overheating” under Engine
Coolant on page 306. Your vehicle could be
damaged and the damages might not be
covered by your warranty.
See Engine Coolant on page 306 for information
on what to do. Your vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel
economy might not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that might not be covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 287.
173
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
174
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your retailer for service as
soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 292.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet.
The condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 289. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the
vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your retailer can check the vehicle.
Your retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order
to help your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your retailer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
175
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low
engine oil pressure
problem, this light will
stay on after you
start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving
enough oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
The oil light may also come on when the ignition
is on but the engine is not running, the light
will come on as a test to show you it is working,
but the light will go out when you turn the
ignition to START. If it does not come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the
fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
176
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others could
be burned. Check your oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Change Engine Oil Light
If this light comes on,
it means that service
is required for
your vehicle.
Security Light
Your vehicle has
a Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 392 and
Engine Oil on page 297 for more information.
With this system, the security light will flash as
you open the door if your ignition is off.
After having the oil changed you will need to reset
the light. See Engine Oil Life System on page 300
for more information.
This light will come on briefly when the vehicle is
turned on.
For more information, see Passlock® on page 110.
177
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light will come on
briefly when you start
the engine.
This light, along with the service engine soon light
will be displayed when a noticeable reduction in
the vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the
vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait for
10 seconds and restart your vehicle. This may
correct the condition.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed
when the reduced engine power light is on
but acceleration and speed may be reduced.
The performance may be reduced until the next
time you drive your vehicle. If this light stays
on, see your retailer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair.
178
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 146.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
This light is located on
the instrument panel
cluster. It comes on
whenever the Daytime
Running Lamps are on.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 152
for further information.
Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on,
your liftgate is not
completely closed.
Driving with the liftgate
open can cause
carbon monoxide (CO)
to enter the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 125 for more
information.
179
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much
fuel you have left in
your tank.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but
you should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning
Light on page 181 for more information.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these mean a condition exists with
your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage
may have indicated the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than
half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a
corner or speed up.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize
after the ignition is turned on, and will go
back to empty when you turn the ignition off.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 387.
180
Low Fuel Warning Light
Auto Stop Mode
The light next to the fuel
gage will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine.
United States
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low
on fuel. When you add fuel the light should go
off. If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
Canada
This mark on the tachometer signifies that the
engine is in Auto Stop mode which is a fuel saving
operation.
When the vehicle is keyed off when parking the
vehicle, the tachometer needle will drop to
OFF (United States) or 0 (Canada). If the driver’s
door is opened while in Auto Stop, a chime will
sound to indicate the engine will restart if you
remove your foot from the brake pedal.
181
Charge/Assist Gage
The CHARGE/ASSIST
gage displays the
charge (current) into
and out of the hybrid
battery.
When the electric motor is performing an
automatic restart of the engine, or when it is
assisting the engine as in a maximum acceleration,
the needle will move to the ASSIST range.
The ASSIST range is on the right side of the gage,
and shows an arrow pointing out of a battery.
182
When the electric motor operates as a generator
to perform regenerative braking while decelerating,
the needle will move to the CHARGE range.
See Regenerative Braking on page 121 for more
information. The needle will also move into
the CHARGE range if the hybrid control system
deems it is an efficient time to charge the
hybrid battery. The CHARGE range is on the left
side of the gage, and shows an arrow pointing
into a battery.
If the hybrid battery or other hybrid components
are very hot or cold, the CHARGE and ASSIST
functions may be suspended until the component
temperatures are normal.
Fuel Economy Light
This light will come on
when the vehicle is
achieving fuel economy
close to rated
performance.
Hill Start Assist Light
If this light comes on,
there may be a problem
with the hill start
assist feature. See your
retailer for service.
By changing your driving habits and increasing the
time that the fuel economy light is on, will improve
fuel economy.
If you are on an incline, your vehicle may roll
backwards a short distance until the engine
performs the auto start.
To turn the fuel economy light off or on, press the
trip/reset button until the fuel economy light is
selected. Once selected, press and hold the
trip/reset button until the fuel economy light
switches to off or on. For more information see
Trip Odometer on page 163.
The hill start assist feature will help hold the
vehicle on a moderate or steep incline when
transitioning from a hybrid idle stop to starting
the engine.
183
Audio System(s)
Hood Ajar Light
If this light comes on,
the hood is not fully
closed. Close the hood
to turn off the light.
The auto start/stop function will not operate with
the hood open. If the vehicle is in auto stop mode
when this light appears, you will have to restart
the engine with the ignition key. See Starting
the Engine (Automatic Engine Start/Stop )
on page 113 for more information.
184
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 233. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far
greater access to audio stations and
song listings. Giving extended attention
to entertainment tasks while driving can
cause a crash and you or others can be
injured or killed. Always keep your
eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended
searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. Here are some ways in which you can
help avoid distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your retailer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been added.
185
Setting the Time
(Without Date Display)
If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with a
single CD player and preset buttons numbered one
through six, the radio has a clock button for
setting the time. You can set the time by following
these steps:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button until the hour numbers
begin flashing on the display. Press the clock
button a second time and the minute
numbers begin flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers
are flashing, turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the time.
4. Press the clock button again until the clock
display stops flashing to set the currently
displayed time; otherwise, the flashing stops
after five seconds and the current time
displayed will be automatically set.
186
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow label.
Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,
press the pushbutton located under the desired
option to select the default. Press the clock button
again to apply the selected default, or let the
screen time out.
Setting the Time
(With Date Display)
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player,
the radio has a clock button for setting the time
and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and
year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one
of the labels that you want to change. Every
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
or the date if selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or REV (reverse) button, or
turn the tune knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio.
The date does not automatically display. To see
the date press the clock button while the radio
is on. The date with display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio
and time display.
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD
player, the radio has a MENU button instead of
the clock button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
option is displayed.
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one
of the labels that you want to change. Every
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
or the date if selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or REV (reverse) button, or turn
the tune knob, located on the upper right
side of the radio.
187
The date does not automatically display. To see
the date press the MENU button and then the
clock button while the radio is on. The date with
display times out after a few seconds and
goes back to the normal radio and time display.
Radio with CD (Base)
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow
these instructions:
1. Press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow
label. Once the time 12H and 24H, and
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
3. Press the clock or MENU button again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen
time out.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
The radio plays at the previous volume setting
whenever the radio is turned on. The volume
can still be manually adjusted by using the
volume knob.
188
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2 or AM. The display shows the selection.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station.
Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep
sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and
released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each
pushbutton.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with
a strong signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time.
189
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass
or treble, press the tune knob or bass/treble
pushbutton until the desired tone control label
displays. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
setting. The setting can also be adjusted by
pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward), or
REV (reverse) buttons. The display shows
the current bass or treble level. If a station’s
frequency is weak or has static, decrease
the treble.
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select
preset equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the
EQ button until Manual displays or start to
manually adjust the bass or treble by pressing
the tune knob.
190
balance or fade, press this button or the tune knob
until the desired speaker control label displays.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the setting. The setting can also be
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, or
REV buttons.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error displays, the radio has not
been configured properly and your vehicle must
be returned to your retailer for service.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on
the radio display. As each new track starts to
play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the
CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on
page 229 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
191
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to
eject the CD. If the CD is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow
is held or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through
the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the track. The elapsed time
of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within a
track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
192
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the CD
tracks can be listened to in random, rather than
sequential order. To use random, do the following:
1. To play tracks from the CD in random
order, press the RDM pushbutton.
The random icon displays.
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play. The random icon displays.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an
entire CD can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track, press and release the
RPT button. An arrow symbol displays.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD, PRESS and hold the RPT
button for a few seconds. An arrow symbol
displays. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play. When repeat is off, the symbol
no longer displays.
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the track number, elapsed time of
the track, and the time. When the ignition is off,
press this button to display the time.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio.
The CD icon and track number displays while a
CD is in the player. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or
the CD ejects, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD-R.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your retailer when reporting the
problem.
193
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
However, an external audio device such as
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as
another source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P).
See Defensive Driving on page 233 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. While a device is connected,
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing
audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
194
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the
volume of the portable player. Additional volume
adjustments from the portable device might
be needed if the volume is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing.
The portable audio device continues playing,
so you might want to stop it or power it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, No Input Device Found displays.
Radio with CD (MP3)
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. While the radio
is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station
can broadcast incorrect information that causes
the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio with CD shown,
Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
195
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows
the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station.
Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with
a strong signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or
MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, CAT can display.
Continue pressing the information button to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under any one of the labels and the
information about that label displays.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
196
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls, if your vehicle
has them. See Defensive Driving on page 233.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations
can be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton
is pressed and released, the station that was
set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
197
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the
tune knob until the tone control labels display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD
(forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desired
levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is
weak, or has static, decrease the treble.
198
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select
preset equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ
button until Manual displays or start to manually
adjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing
the tune knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the
tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting
can also be adjusted by pressing either the
SEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desired levels
are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode.
To find XM™ channels within a desired category,
perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency displays. Press the CAT button to
display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the
desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with
that category.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
199
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Radio Messages
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category is displayed or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 212 later in this
section for further detail.
200
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error displays, the radio has not
been configured properly and your vehicle must
be returned to your retailer for service.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds. A beep sounds and
Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when
to insert the discs. The CD player takes
up to six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur,
check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface
of the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 229 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
201
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player and
begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the
eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow
is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the track. The elapsed time
of the track displays.
202
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within a track.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting,
the tracks can be listened to in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a
six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks from the CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a
six-disc CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays.
Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and track number displays when a CD is in
the player.
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
An external audio device such as a portable audio
player can be connected to the auxiliary input
jack for use as another source for playing CDs.
Press the CD/AUX button again and the system
begins playing audio from the connected portable
audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, No Input Device Found displays.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the
MP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of
playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 205 later
in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your retailer when reporting the
problem.
203
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
However, an external audio device such as
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as
another source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P).
See Defensive Driving on page 233 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing
audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
204
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the
volume of the portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might be needed from the portable
device if the volume is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing.
The portable audio device continues playing,
so you might want to stop it or power it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, No Input Device Found displays.
Radio with CD and DVD
If you are interested in learning more about the
radio and CD audio functions for this type of radio
system, see Radio with CD (Base) on page 188
or Radio with CD (MP3) on page 195 earlier in this
section for more information.
If you are interested in learning more about the
DVD functions of this radio system, see Rear Seat
Entertainment System on page 214 later in this
section for more information.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system, the vehicle has a radio that accepts
either CD audio or DVD video.
The radio with CD and DVD is very similar to the
radio with CD (Base) or the radio with CD (MP3).
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Song title, artist name, and album are available for
display by the radio when recorded using ID3
tags version 1 and 2.
205
Compressed Audio
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
MP3 files. By default the radio reads only the
uncompressed audio and ignore the MP3 files.
Pressing the CAT (category) button toggles
between compressed and uncompressed
audio format.
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension (other file extensions might
not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and
folders, or playlists can cause the player to be
unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
to play a large number of files, folders, playlists
or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take
up more space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc can
cause the disc not to function in the player.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files
on one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
206
Change playlists by using the previous and next
folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.
You can also play an MP3 CD-R that was recorded
using no file folders. If a CD-R contains more than
the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files, the player lets you access and navigate
up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum
are not accessible.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed
audio files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT.
All files contained directly under the root directory
are accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere
in the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
No Folder
When the CD-R contains only compressed files,
the files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions do not display on
a CD-R that was recorded without folders or
playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD-R contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons searches playlists (Px)
first and then go to the root folder. When the
radio displays the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
207
Order of Play
File System and Naming
Tracks recorded to the CD-R are played in the
following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has been played, play
continues from the first track of the first folder.
The song name that is displayed is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default
display. The new track name displays.
208
Track names longer than 32 characters or four
pages are shortened. The display does not show
parts of words on the last page of text and the
extension of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD
Player), or press the load button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),
label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R
should begin playing.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R in the
player it stays in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD-R starts to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size
CD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in the
same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the
CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on
page 229 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
209
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc
is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R automatically pulls
back into the player and begins playing. For the
Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on
the CD-R currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3 file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next MP3 file. If either
SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through MP3 files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
210
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an
MP3 file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file.
The elapsed time of the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3
files on the CD-R can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R
or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random,
do one of the following:
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you are
listening to in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a
six-disc CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It can take several minutes to scan
the disc depending on the number of MP3 files
recorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playing
while it is scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD-R begins
playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player
defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist.
The current artist playing is shown on the
second line of the display between the arrows.
Once all songs by that artist are played, the player
moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on
the CD-R and begin playing MP3 files by that
artist. To listen to MP3 files by another artist,
press the pushbutton located below either arrow
button. The CD goes to the next or previous artist
in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback
by album, press the pushbutton located below
the Sort By label. From the sort screen, push
one of the buttons below the album button. Press
the pushbutton below the back label to return
to the main music navigator screen. Now the
album name is displayed on the second line
between the arrows and songs from the current
album begins to play. Once all songs from
that album are played, the player moves to the
next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R and
begins playing MP3 files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the
pushbutton below the Back label to return to
normal MP3 playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
displays while a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Aux Input Device displays.
211
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
XM Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune
to another station. If this station was one of the presets, choose
another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
212
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM TheftLocked
Theftlock® active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
retailer.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.
Check XM Receivr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your retailer.
XM Not Available
XM™ Not Available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your retailer.
213
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Headphones
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system
works with the vehicle’s audio system and includes
a radio that accepts CD audio or DVD video,
a video display screen, two sets of wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
The RSE includes two sets of wireless
headphones that are only dedicated to this
system. These headphones are used to listen to
the radio with CD and DVD or an auxiliary
device connected to the RCA jacks. The wireless
headphones have an ON/OFF switch and a
volume control.
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video
screen while driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the
RSE system might not work until the temperature
is within the operating range. The operating
range for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)
or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of
your vehicle is outside of this range, heat or cool
the vehicle until the temperature is within the
operating range of the RSE system.
214
To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON.
An indicator light on the headphones comes
on. If the light does not come on, the batteries
might need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Switch the headphones to OFF when
not in use.
The infrared transmitters are located in the display
below the video screen. The headphones shut
off automatically to save the battery power if the
DVD system is shut off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or
step out of the vehicle, the headphones lose the
audio signal.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Slide open the battery door located on the
left side of the headphones.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Slide the battery door shut.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
215
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are color coded to match typical
home entertainment system equipment. The yellow
jack (right) is for the video input. The white jack
(middle) is for the left audio input. The red
jack (left) is for the right audio input. The red
connector must always be used in order for the
DVD system to recognize that an external source
is plugged in. With the radio on, the screen
automatically switches to the rear auxiliary input
when the red connector cable is inserted.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
The RCA jacks are located behind the video
screen on the overhead console. The RCA jacks
allow audio or video signals to be connected
from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a
video game unit to the RSE. Adapter connectors
or cables might be required to connect the
auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
216
To use the auxiliary function, connect a camcorder
or a video game unit to the RCA jacks and turn
on the auxiliary device. To view a DVD, insert the
DVD into the CD/DVD loading slot on the radio.
The system automatically switches to DVD
and starts to play. To switch between the auxiliary
device and the DVD, press the DVD/AUX button
on the radio faceplate or the SRCE (source) button
on the remote control. See “DVD Player” and
“Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
Audio Output
Video Screen
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time.
Press the power button to turn the radio on.
The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle
speakers.
When a DVD is inserted, playback is heard
through the vehicle speakers and headphones.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio
by pressing the BAND button to select AM, FM or
XM™ (if equipped). The rear seat speakers are
muted for radio listening, and the DVD plays
through the headphones (RSE Mode).
When RCA jacks are connected, the rear speakers
are muted. The rear seat passengers are able
to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the
wireless headphones. The front seat passengers
are able to listen to the radio through the front
speakers, by pressing the BAND button to select
AM, FM, or XM (if equipped), or listen to a CD
that is inserted into the radio.
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s
auxiliary input jack, the device can be heard
through all of the vehicle speakers. In RSE mode
the playback device is only heard through the
front speakers.
The video screen is located in the overhead
console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push forward on the release button located on
the DVD display console.
2. Pull the screen down, away from you, and
adjust its position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its
locked position, the screen shuts off, but the
DVD continues to play through the previous audio
or video source.
The video screen contains the transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the receivers for the
remote control. If the screen is in the closed
position, the signals are not available for the
operation of the headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
217
DVD Player
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs that
are authorized for use in the United States and
Canada (Region Code 1). The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs. Most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s can also be
played by the radio with CD and DVD.
If an error message displays on the video screen
or the radio, see “DVD Player Error Messages”
later in this section.
Auxiliary Input Jack
The DVD player is part of the radio and is located
in the center of the instrument panel.
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on
the radio faceplate, or by the buttons on the
remote control. See “Remote Control” later in this
section for more information.
218
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
An external audio device such as an iPod,
MP3 player, or cassette player can be connected
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
DVD Player Buttons
f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on a
To learn about the DVD functions for this type
of radio system, read the following for more
information on the DVD player.
CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or to
change clock or date settings, while in the clock
or date setting mode. See Setting the Time
(Without Date Display) on page 186 or Setting the
Time (With Date Display) on page 186 for more
information.
DVD/AUX (Auxiliary): While a DVD is playing,
press this button to switch between front auxiliary
and RSE.
To listen to a DVD through the headphones, press
this button.
While a CD is playing, press this button to switch
between playing a CD or the front auxiliary,
if not in RSE mode. If the system is in RSE mode,
press the power button on the remote control
first, to listen to the CD through the headphones,
while the front passengers listen to the front
auxiliary.
O(Power): Press this knob to turn the radio/DVD
player on. Turn this knob clockwise to or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume. A single press turns the radio off, a quick
double press turns off the entire radio and rear
seat entertainment system.
©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this
button to return to the start of the current track
or chapter. Press this button again to go to
the previous track or chapter. This button might
not work while the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
¨SEEK (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button
to advance to the beginning of the next track or
chapter. This button might not work while the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
sREV (Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD or CD, five times the normal
speed. The radio displays the elapsed time while
in fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press
this button again. This button might not work while
the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
219
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button to
DVD Display Buttons
fast forward the DVD or CD. The radio displays the
elapsed time and fast forwards five times the
normal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button might not work while
the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
Once a DVD is inserted, a screen display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press
the pushbuttons located under any desired tag
option during DVD playback. See the tag options
listed below for more information:
Some DVDs begins playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the
radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer to the
on-screen instructions, if available.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or
CD. If a DVD or CD is ejected, but not removed,
the player automatically pulls it back in after
15 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing
the movie automatically, press the pushbutton
located under the play symbol tag displayed on the
radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer to the
on-screen instructions (if available).
220
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
pause icon displayed on the radio system,
to toggle between pausing or restarting playback
of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on
display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause
icon is showing on display, the system is in
playback mode.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choices that are highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the pushbuttons located under the
navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the
enter button. This button only operates when
using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display
directional arrows for navigating through the menus.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button operates only when a DVD is playing
and a menu is active.
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and display
“Loading Disc” on the video screen. At the same
time, the radio displays a softkey menu of options.
The first option tag located on the left-hand side
of the menu options, displays alternately the play
or pause symbols. This indicates the system is
loading the disc or is not yet ready to accept a play
button press. The displayed symbol arrow
remains until the disc is completely loaded or
Promos and Copyright information has ended.
The time can vary depending on the discs media
type and format. Once the DVD is loaded into
the system, a pause icon displays instead of the
forward arrow. This indicates the system is in play
mode, and the disc automatically starts playback.
Loading a disc into the system usually takes
approximately 30 seconds for playback to begin.
If a DVD is already in the radio, press the
play/pause button on the remote control, or press
the pushbutton located under the play symbol
tag displayed on the radio to start playing the disc,
when the DVD system is active.
The DVD player might not accept some paper
labeled media.
The DVD player/video screen can only be turned
on by pressing the power button on the remote
control or by inserting a DVD.
221
Playing an MP3 CD
The CD player has the ability to recognize up to
255 folders, and up to 255 files per folder to
a maximum of 512 total MP3 selections on a CD.
Mixed media CD’s are not supported.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To turn the RSE system off, press the power
button twice on the radio.
To turn the RSE system back on again, press the
power button on the radio, then press the
DVD/AUX button. This brings up the softkey menu
displayed on the radio. Press the play/pause
icon to begin playback from where it had
previously stopped.
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the
system, press the stop button on the remote
control, or press the pushbutton located under the
stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed
on the radio.
222
To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause
button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol
tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should
resume play from where it last stopped if the disc
has not been ejected and the stop button has
not been pressed twice on the remote control.
If the disc has been ejected or the stop button
has been pressed twice on the remote control,
the disc resumes playing at the beginning of
the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the radio to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed,
the radio reloads the disc after a short period of
time. The disc is stored in the radio. The radio
does not resume play of the disc automatically.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the
desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter
to receive signals from the remote control. If the
remote control does not seem to be working,
the batteries might need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight could also affect
the function of the remote control.
The DVD player can only be turned on by pressing
the DVD/AUX button on the radio.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight can damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSE
screen on and off (also powers up the DVD player
if a disc is loaded).
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the
remote control backlight on. The backlight
times out after seven to ten seconds if no other
button is pressed while the backlight is on.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to
the main menu of the DVD.
223
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on
every DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.
After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when using a DVD.
{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles
and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function varies for each disc.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
| (Camera Angle): Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature
when a DVD is playing. The format and content of
this function varies for each disc.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
choices that are highlighted in any menu.
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing,
press this button again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust
the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display
mode (normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce
loud audio and increase low audio produced by
some DVDs.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button operates only when a DVD is playing
and a menu is active.
e (Audio): Press this button to display a menu
that only appears when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function varies for
each disc.
224
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding,
press this button again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this
button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a DVD or CD. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this button
again to continue playing the DVD.
\ (Clear): Press this button, within three seconds
after entering a numeric selection to clear all
numeric inputs.
While the DVD is playing, press the pause button
then press the fast forward button. The DVD
continues playing in a slow play mode. To cancel
slow play mode, press the play/pause button.
to select chapter, title, and track numbers greater
than nine. Press this button before inputting
the number.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button
to return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to
advance to the beginning of the next track
or chapter. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press the button,
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the
following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door
located on the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
225
DVD Player Error Messages
DVD Distortion
The video screen could display one of the
following:
Video distortion could occur when operating
cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global
Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios,
mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays
when there are disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the
disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side
up, or if the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the
disc is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no
disc is present when the EJECT or DVD/AUX
button is pressed on the radio.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near
the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and
buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as
damage could result.
226
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at
the steering wheel.
They include the
following:
x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and
stay there. The radio seeks stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until SCAN displays and a beep
sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station.
Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
While a CD is playing, press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or previous track.
To scan the current CD, press and hold either
up or down arrow for more than two seconds.
The CD goes to the next track, plays the first
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press
either up or down arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and
hold either up or down arrow for more than
four seconds. The CD goes to the next CD, plays
the first 10 seconds of each track, then goes to the
next CD. Press either up or down arrow again to
stop scanning.
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the volume.
g (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, to turn the sound on.
227
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
Frequency interference and static during normal
radio reception can occur if items such as
cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices are
plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels during the night.
Static can also occur when things like storms
and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
228
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels could
cause loss of XM signal for a period of time.
The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL to
indicate interference.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
CD mechanism.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base. If tightening is
required, tighten by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
A vehicle with a sunroof might not get the
best performance from the XM™ system if the
sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
229
✍ NOTES
230
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle ............................................ 232
Driver Behavior ......................................... 232
Driving Environment .................................. 232
Vehicle Design .......................................... 232
Defensive Driving ...................................... 233
Drunken Driving ........................................ 234
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 237
Braking ...................................................... 237
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 238
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 240
Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 240
Steering .................................................... 241
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 244
Passing ..................................................... 244
Loss of Control .......................................... 246
Driving at Night ......................................... 247
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 248
City Driving ............................................... 251
Freeway Driving ........................................ 252
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 253
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 254
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 255
Winter Driving ........................................... 257
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .......................................... 261
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 262
Recovery Hook .......................................... 262
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 264
Towing ........................................................ 270
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 270
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 270
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 274
231
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Whenever we drive, we are taking on an
important responsibility. This is true for any motor
vehicle — passenger car, van, truck, sport utility.
Driver behavior, the driving environment, and the
vehicle’s design all affect how well a vehicle
performs. But statistics show that the most
important factor, by far, is how we drive.
Knowing how these three factors work together can
help you understand how your vehicle handles and
what you can do to avoid many types of crashes,
including a rollover crash.
Driver Behavior
The single most important thing is this: everyone in
the vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up.
See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on
page 20. In fact, most serious injuries and fatalities
to unbelted occupants can be reduced or prevented
by the use of safety belts. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt. In addition,
avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt turns,
232
and drunken or aggressive driving can help make
trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash,
especially a rollover crash. This section provides
many useful tips to help you drive more safely.
Driving Environment
You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of
crash by being prepared for driving in inclement
weather, at night, or during other times where
visibility or traction may be limited, such as on
curves, slippery roads, or hilly terrain. Unfamiliar
surroundings can also have hidden hazards.
To help you learn more about driving in different
conditions, this section contains information about
city, freeway, and off-road driving, as well as other
hints for driving in various weather conditions.
Vehicle Design
According to the U.S. Department of
Transportation, utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Utility vehicles do have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track or shorter wheelbase than
passenger cars, to make them more capable for
off-road driving.
Specific design characteristics like these give the
driver a better view of the road, but also give utility
vehicles a higher center of gravity than other types
of vehicles. This means that you should not expect
a utility vehicle to handle the same way a vehicle
with a lower center of gravity, like a car, would in
similar situations.
But driver behavior factors are far more often the
cause of a utility vehicle rollover than are
environmental or vehicle factors. Safe driver
behavior and understanding the environment in
which you will be driving can help avoid a rollover
crash in any type of vehicle, including utility
vehicles.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 20.
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
233
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
234
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink alcohol,
so they never drive after drinking. For persons
under 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to
drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water than
men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher
BAC level than a man of her same body weight will
when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
235
But the ability to drive is affected well below a
BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that
the driving skills of many people are impaired at a
BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the
effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired
at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics
show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is
12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the
chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid
the collision.
236
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 240.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 287.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 169.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of
a second. But that is only an average. It might be
less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
237
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 287.
238
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system
that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear
a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that the
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning
Light on page 170.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
This can help you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at
each wheel.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
239
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or
always decrease stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have
time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly
slows or stops. Always leave enough room up
ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if it senses that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
When this happens, the system reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
This light will come on
when your traction
control system is limiting
wheel spin.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
See Low Traction Light on page 171. You may
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you
can turn the traction control system off if you ever
need to. You should turn the system off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow
240
and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking
Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 262 and If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 261 for more information.
The traction control
system can be turned
off by pressing this
button.
The button is located on the instrument panel
above the audio system.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you
press this button, the system will not turn off until
there is no longer a current need to limit wheel
spin. You can turn the system back on at any time
by pressing the button again. If the traction
control warning light does not come on, you may
not have traction control and your vehicle
should be serviced at a retailer.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the
power steering assist system will continue
to operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.
If you lose power steering assist because the
electric power steering system is not functioning,
you can steer, but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction
several times until it stops, or hold the steering
wheel in the stopped position for an extended
amount of time, you may notice a reduced amount
of power steering assist. The normal amount of
power steering assist should return shortly after a
few normal steering movements.
The electric power steering system does not
require regular maintenance. If you suspect
steering system problems and/or the Service
Vehicle Soon light comes on, contact your retailer
for service repairs.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 287 for more information.
241
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 240.
242
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the
vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 287.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. See Braking
on page 237. It is better to remove as much speed
as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If you are holding the steering
wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very
quickly without removing either hand. But you
have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly
straighten the wheel once you have avoided
the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
243
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder
while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane
as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
244
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line usually
indicates it is all right to pass, providing the
road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid line on
your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching
traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right
lane and do not get too close. Time your move
so you will be increasing speed as the time
comes to move into the other lane. If the way
is clear to pass, you will have a running
start that more than makes up for the distance
you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel
your pass, you need only slow down and drop
back again and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
•
•
•
•
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that
your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem
to be farther away from you than it really is.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
245
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
246
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
control system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
glare from headlamps behind you.
247
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
248
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is
always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow
down before you hit them.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good
shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal
lightly until the brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
{CAUTION:
249
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through the engine’s air intake and badly
damage the engine. Never drive through water
that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or
standing water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very
cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
CAUTION:
250
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 339.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 252.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light
turns green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
251
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive
at the same speed most of the other drivers are
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a
smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway
as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
252
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh — such as
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out.
Of course, you will find experienced and able
service experts at Saturn retailers all across the
United States and Canada. They will be ready and
willing to help if you need it.
Reduce your speed according to your
speedometer, not to your sense of motion.
After driving for any distance at higher speeds,
you may tend to think you are going slower than
you actually are.
253
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
254
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
and your instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine assist
the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
255
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can
climb the hill better.
256
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide
traction. Be sure you properly secure these items
in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 339.
257
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile
traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels
will spin and polish the surface under the tires
even more.
258
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) on page 238.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
259
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must.
This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
260
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. And, the transaxle or
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.
That could cause an engine compartment
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting the
transaxle back and forth, you can destroy the
transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get
It Out on page 262.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 356.
261
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around the front wheels. You should
turn the traction control system off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 240. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause
a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that
does not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it
may need to be towed out. Or, you can use the
recovery hook if your vehicle has one. If your
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 270.
262
Recovery Hook
{CAUTION:
The recovery hook, when used, is under a
lot of force. Always pull the vehicle
straight out. Never pull on the hook at a
sideways angle. The hook could break off
and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged
and it would not be covered by warranty.
Contact your retailer if you would like to have a
recovery hook installed on your vehicle.
The recovery hook is located at the rear of your
vehicle. It can only be used for pulling the vehicle
out if it is stuck, not for towing the vehicle.
263
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
264
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 339 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 345.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
265
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 274 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules
and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
266
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight.
267
Certification/Tire Label
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your retailer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
Similar looking vehicles may have different
GVWRs and payloads. Please consult your
vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or your retailer
for additional details.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached
to the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer
tongue weight, if your vehicle is pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
268
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your vehicle’s
weight ratings. Ask your retailer to help you
load your vehicle correctly if you are using these
components.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
269
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 413.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
270
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment,
many vehicles can be towed in these ways.
See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following
in this section.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
a Long Trip on page 253.
Dinghy Towing
Your hybrid vehicle may be dinghy towed from the
front. It may also be towed by putting the front
wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this
section.
To tow your vehicle from the front with all
four wheels on the ground, do the following:
1. Position and attach the vehicle to tow it behind
the recreational vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC.
3. Turn fog lamps and all accessories off.
271
4. Shift the transaxle from DRIVE (D) to
NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine run for
three minutes. Then turn it off.
Due to transaxle fluid drain back, the transaxle
lubrication procedure in Step 4 is required
every seven hours after the initial procedure
has been completed, regardless of the vehicle
being towed or parked. Once the procedure
is performed, the transaxle is adequately
lubricated and can be recreational vehicle
towed for seven hours prior to repeating the
lubrication procedure.
As an example, if you initially perform the
lubrication procedure and tow your vehicle for
three hours, then park for four hours, the
lubrication procedure will need to be
performed again, prior to dinghy towing the
vehicle.
Notice: Towing your vehicle after shifting the
transaxle from anything other than DRIVE (D)
to NEUTRAL (N) can cause internal damage to
the transaxle. Always shift the transaxle
from DRIVE (D) to NEUTRAL (N) as the last
shift before towing.
272
5. Locate and remove the large IGN fuse from
the underhood fuse block. See Underhood
Fuse Block on page 382.
Notice: If you tow your vehicle without
performing each of the steps listed under
“Dinghy Towing,” you could damage the
automatic transaxle. Be sure to follow all steps
of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and
after towing your vehicle.
Notice: Your vehicle can be dinghy towed
from the front for unlimited miles at 65 mph
(105 km/h). If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)
while towing your vehicle, it could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)
while towing your vehicle.
Once you have reached your destination, do the
following:
1. Set the parking brake.
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear
2. Shift the transaxle to PARK (P).
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove the
key from the ignition.
4. Reinstall the large IGN fuse.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage the transaxle. Be sure that the
transaxle fluid is at the proper level before
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front drive
wheels on the ground if the two front tires
are of different sizes. Towing with two different
tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can
cause severe damage to the transaxle.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear
could damage it. Also, repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Never have your
vehicle towed from the rear.
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.
273
Dolly Towing
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
To tow your vehicle from the front with two wheels
on the ground, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
274
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask
your retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a
trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part
and see your retailer for important information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify
the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. Trailering
is different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transaxle, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires
are forced to work harder against the drag of
the added weight. The engine is required
to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you’ll be driving.
A good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.
This helps your engine and other parts of
your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• Use INTERMEDIATE (I) or as you need to, a
lower gear which will minimize heat buildup
and extend the life of your transaxle.
275
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a
trailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximum
posted speed for trailers, or no more than
55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your
vehicle’s parts.
• Don’t tow a trailer when the outside
temperature is above 100°F (38°C).
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs
(680 kg). But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend on
any special equipment that you have on your
276
vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
You can ask your retailer for trailering information
or advice.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or
gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you have
a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your
vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer
weight your vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer,
you must add the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 264 for more
information about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional
weight may reduce your trailering capacity more
than the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the
total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle
and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has
a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR
of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross
Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs
(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able
to get them right simply by moving some items
around in the trailer.
277
You can expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
because the weight is applied well behind the
rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater
than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times
as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,
but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The
vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.
278
You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle
weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight.
Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to
stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go
further and think you must limit tongue weight to
less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding
GVWR. But, you must still consider the effect on the
rear axle. Because your rear axle now weighs
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding
RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about
1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs
(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to
handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of
total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You will find these
numbers on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 264.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for
your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you will need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not
intended for hitches. Do not attach rental
hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.
Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not
attach to the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal
them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 125. Dirt and water can, too.
279
Safety Chains
Driving with a Trailer
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes
separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety
chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the
bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes are working.
This lets you check your electrical connection at
the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
Trailer Brakes
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. Do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both your vehicle’s brakes and your trailer’s
brakes will not work well, or at all.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the
trailer brakes, so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
280
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a
good deal longer when towing a trailer, you’ll need
to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just
move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.
See your retailer if you need information.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to
turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs
on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
281
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous
grades exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,
higher than normal engine and transaxle
temperatures may result and damage your
vehicle. Frequent stops are very important to
allow the engine and transaxle to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
don’t shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce
your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transaxle
overheating. If your engine does overheat,
see Engine Overheating on page 309.
282
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P).
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away
from the curb. When parking downhill,
turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the
trailer wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 392 for more information. Things that
are especially important in trailer operation are
automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil,
drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
283
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Trailer Wiring
The wires do not have a connector and should be
wired to the trailer by a qualified electrical
technician. The technician can use the following
information when connecting a trailer wiring
harness to your vehicle.
• Yellow: Left Turn Signal
• Brown: Parking Lamps
• Light Blue: Stop Lamps
• Black: Ground Wire
• Dark Green: Right Turn Signal
Additional wire length has been provided for
connecting trailer wiring to your vehicle. A loop of
five wires is located in the storage compartment on
the driver’s side of the cargo area. The wires are
fused in both the underhood and instrument fuse
block. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
page 381 and Underhood Fuse Block on page 382.
When connecting a trailer harness, be sure you
leave it loose enough so the wiring does not bend
or break, but not so loose that it drags on the
ground. Store the harness in the storage
compartment on the driver’s side of the cargo area
when the harness is not in use. Wrap the harness
together and tie it neatly so it will not be damaged.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat
during severe operating conditions. See Engine
Overheating on page 309.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
If you get a flat tire while towing a trailer, be
sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from
the vehicle before changing the tire.
284
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 287
Accessories and Modifications ................... 287
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 288
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 288
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .......................................... 289
Fuel ............................................................. 289
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 289
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 289
California Fuel ........................................... 290
Additives ................................................... 290
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 291
Filling the Tank ......................................... 292
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 294
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 294
Hood Release ........................................... 295
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 296
Engine Oil ................................................. 297
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 300
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 302
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 305
Engine Coolant .......................................... 306
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 309
Engine Overheating ................................... 309
Cooling System ......................................... 311
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 317
Brakes ...................................................... 318
Battery ...................................................... 321
Jump Starting ............................................ 322
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 328
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 331
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 331
Headlamps ................................................ 331
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ....... 334
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) ................................ 335
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ...................................... 336
License Plate Lamp ................................... 337
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 337
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 338
285
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ............................................................ 339
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 340
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 342
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 345
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 348
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 349
Buying New Tires ...................................... 350
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 351
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 352
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 353
Wheel Replacement .................................. 353
Tire Chains ............................................... 356
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 357
Tire Inflator Kit .......................................... 358
Appearance Care ........................................ 370
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 370
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 372
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 373
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 373
Weatherstrips ............................................ 373
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 374
286
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 374
Finish Care ............................................... 374
Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 375
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 376
Tires ......................................................... 376
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 377
Finish Damage .......................................... 377
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 377
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 377
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 378
Vehicle Identification .................................. 379
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 379
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 379
Electrical System ........................................ 380
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 380
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 380
Power Windows and Other
Power Options ....................................... 380
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 380
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 381
Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 382
Capacities and Specifications .................... 387
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best and
wants you to be happy with it. We hope you
will go to your retailer for all your service needs.
You will get genuine Saturn parts and
Saturn-trained and supported service people.
When you add non-Saturn accessories to your
vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions
systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic
systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle
all Saturn.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
Saturn accessories are designed to complement
and function with other systems on your
vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorize your
vehicle using genuine Saturn accessories.
When you go to your Saturn retailer and ask for
Saturn accessories, you will know that
Saturn-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine Saturn
accessories.
287
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,
many parts and systems (including some inside
the vehicle), many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
Never try to do your own service on
hybrid components. You can be injured
and your vehicle can be damaged if you
try to do your own service work. Service
and repair of these hybrid components
should only be performed by a
Saturn-trained service technician with the
proper knowledge and tools.
288
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important
part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
To help keep your engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, Saturn recommends
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you may notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). Saturn recommends against the use
of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on
page 290 for additional information.
289
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 173. If this occurs, return to
your authorized Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that
is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
290
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines
may be available in your area. We recommend that
you use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the emission
control system may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to
your retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
291
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the
law in some places. Do not re-enter
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children
away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
292
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if the cap is released too soon, it will spring
back to the right.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. This spray can
happen if your tank is nearly full, and is
more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to
stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 374.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 173.
3
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow
of fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage your
fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 173.
293
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while
it is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping gasoline.
294
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located
under the instrument
panel on the
driver’s side of the
vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up
on the secondary hood release lever.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
295
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, you will see the following:
296
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 302.
B. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (On generator).
See Jump Starting on page 322.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view). See Engine
Oil on page 297.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on
page 297.
E. Hybrid Underhood Fuse Block (Under engine
cover).
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir (Under engine cover).
See Brakes on page 318.
G. Main Underhood Fuse Block. Contains Remote
Positive (+) Terminal (Under engine cover).
See Jump Starting on page 322.
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling
System on page 311.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 317.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 296
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
297
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, you need to add at least
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 387.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the upper mark that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could be damaged.
298
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 296 for the
location of the engine
oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you
are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
299
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide
easier cold starting and better protection for
the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the
oil life system to work properly, you must reset
the system every time the oil is changed.
300
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A change engine oil light will
come on. See Change Engine Oil Light on
page 177. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using genuine
Saturn parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at
the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a change engine oil light
being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the
engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
If the change engine oil light is flashing, the
system is reset. The light will flash for up
to 30 seconds or until the ignition is turned off.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that
may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails
with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your
used oil, ask your retailer, a service station or a
local recycling center for help.
If the light comes on again and stays on for
30 seconds at the next ignition cycle, it did not
reset. You will need to reset the system again.
301
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 296
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 392 for
more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
1. Unscrew the clamp on the air duct hose.
302
2. Disconnect the hose.
3. Release the clamps on the side of the
air cleaner assembly.
4. Turn the cover upward to disengage the
cover hinges.
303
5. Remove the air cleaner cover assembly and
air filter element.
304
6. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
If the air filter element is dirty, you should
replace it. If it is only dusty, it may be cleaned
by blowing compressed air through it from
the clean side.
Make sure you are away from the engine
compartment when cleaning the air filter with
compressed air.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct
for cracks, cuts and deterioration. The air
outlet duct must be replaced if damaged.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the
engine air cleaner/filter cover and air
duct hose.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid
level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to
your retailer’s service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 395, and
be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 401.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 401.
305
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years
or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever
occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 309.
306
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to
−34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times
a year, have your retailer check your cooling
system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed
in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 401 for more information.
307
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
The surge tank is located on the driver’s side
of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 296 for more
information on location.
308
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at the COLD FILL line. When your engine is warm,
the level should be at the COLD FILL line or a
little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,
but only when the engine is cool. See Engine
Overheating on page 309 for instructions on
“How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
If you need to replace your coolant surge tank
pressure cap, see your retailer.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature warning light
on the vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 172.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open
the hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
309
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little
too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on,
turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a
traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise,
shift to the highest gear possible while driving.
310
If you no longer have the overheat warning,
you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about ten minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues and you have not
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle
right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the
engine for three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools
down. The vehicle should be parked on a
level surface.
A. Electric Engine Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
311
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL
line. If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
312
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fan
is running. If the engine is overheating, the
fan should be running. If it is not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by
your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at the COLD
FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant
on page 306 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
313
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
314
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
This will allow any pressure still left to be
vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLD
FILL line.
315
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level
is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling
system has cooled down. If the coolant is not at
the proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 and
reinstall the pressure cap. If the coolant still is not
at the proper level when the system cools down
again, see your retailer.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
316
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield or rear window washer
fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s
instructions before use. If you will be operating
your vehicle in an area where the temperature may
fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 296
for reservoir location.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
317
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 296 for the
location of the reservoir.
The brake master cylinder reservoir is located
under the engine cover. To access the reservoir,
pull up on the engine cover and lift it off the engine.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that
the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level
during normal brake lining wear. When new linings
are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other
reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake
system. If it is, you should have your brake system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes will not work well, or will not work at all.
318
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will
have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is done on
the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your
brake warning light will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 169.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 401.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 374.
319
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum
brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
320
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to Saturn
torque specifications.
Your rear drum brakes do not have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake
rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings
inspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drums
should be removed and inspected each time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing.
When you have the front brake pads replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your retailer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a
moderate or heavier stop, then your brakes might
not adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,
then — very carefully — make a few moderate
brake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),
so your brakes will adjust properly.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work
well together if the vehicle is to have really
good braking. Your vehicle was designed and
tested with top-quality brake parts. When you
replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and
you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved Saturn replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings
that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 322 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Your vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery
and a 36-volt hybrid battery system.
12-Volt Battery
When it is time for a new standard 12-volt battery,
get one that has the replacement number
shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
321
36-Volt Battery System
Jump Starting
If you need a new 36-volt hybrid battery system,
see your retailer.
Your hybrid vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery
in the engine compartment, and a 36-volt
battery under the rear load floor.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
30 days or more you should disconnect the
standard 12-volt battery by disconnecting the
negative battery cable, the one that is exposed.
Remember to reconnect the battery when you are
ready to drive your vehicle.
Notice: The 36-volt hybrid battery system
should be serviced only by a qualified facility
to avoid battery system damage. See your
retailer if service is needed.
Notice: If the vehicle is not driven for over
two months, the 36-volt hybrid battery can be
permanently damaged.
The 36-volt battery is located behind the rear seat,
under the cargo floor. If the vehicle is stored for
an extended period of time, drive the vehicle every
two months for about half an hour to keep the
36-volt hybrid battery charged and in good working
condition.
322
{CAUTION:
Personal injury or damage to the vehicle
can result if you try jump starting or using
a battery charger on the 36-volt battery.
Use only the 12-volt battery for jump
starting and charging.
If your vehicle’s standard 12-volt battery has run
down, you may want to use another vehicle
and some jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure.
Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a
manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
323
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open each vehicle’s hood and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal
locations of the other vehicle. Your vehicle
has a remote positive (+) 12-volt jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on
the battery. The remote positive (+) terminal
is located under the engine cover on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment.
324
To access the remote positive (+) terminal,
remove the engine cover by pulling up on the
cover and lifting it off the engine. Locate
the underhood fuse block and lift off cover.
The remote positive (+) terminal cover has a
red “+” on it. Remove the red rubber cap
to expose the jump start terminal.
5. The remote negative (−) terminal is located
on the generator on the passenger’s side
of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 296 for more
information on location of the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminals.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle.
But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
do not, explosive gas could be present.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
325
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too. Before you connect the
cables to the other vehicle, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will
go to positive (+) or to a remote positive
terminal (+) if the vehicle has one.
Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal, if the vehicle has one. Do not
connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will
get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too.
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
remote positive (+) terminal of your hybrid
vehicle.
326
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the other vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Do not let the other end
touch anything until the next step. The other
end of the negative (−) cable does not go
to the dead battery. It goes to your vehicle’s
remote negative (−) terminal. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the
chance of sparks getting back to the battery is
much less.
10. Try to start the hybrid vehicle.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the underhood fuse block cover and
engine cover to their original positions.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
327
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been
preset at the factory and should need no further
adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,
the aim of the headlamps may be affected and
adjustment may be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at
you, this may mean the vertical aim of your
headlamps needs to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim
the headlamps as described in the following
procedure.
328
The vehicle should be properly prepared as
follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the
headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a level
surface which is level all the way to the wall.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is
perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or
mud on it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all
other work stopped while headlamp aiming is
being performed.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs
(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s
low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps
will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps
are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 295 for more information.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the
low-beam headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the
aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record
the distance.
4. At the wall measure from the ground
upward (A) to the recorded distance
from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall
the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve
beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a
headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows
only the beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface.
329
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,
which are under the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
E8 Torx® socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal
tape line. Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle
of the beam.
330
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows
the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement
Bulbs on page 337.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
A. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
B. Low-beam Headlamp/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
C. High-beam Headlamp
331
To replace one of the headlamp bulbs, use the
following procedure. To replace the parking/turn
signal lamp bulb, see Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps on page 334.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 295 for more information.
3. Remove the two screws retaining the
headlamp assembly.
2. Remove the two screws from the top of the
front fascia and grille. They are inboard of
the headlamp assembly.
332
4. Insert a flat blade tool through the opening in
the top. Make sure the tool fits through the
opening in the headlamp bracket lower arm.
5. Push the locking tab toward the rear of the
vehicle with the tool to lift the headlamp
bracket lower arm.
6. Pull back on the front fascia and then pull the
headlamp assembly out from the vehicle. You
may need someone to assist you with this step.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
bulb assembly.
8. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to
remove it from the housing.
9. Replace the old bulb with a new one.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to reinstall.
333
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp
bulb, do the following:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 under Headlamps
on page 331 to access the front turn signal
or parking lamp.
2. Turn the bulb to be replaced counterclockwise
to remove it from the headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket assembly.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket
assembly.
5. Insert the bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly.
6. Turn the bulb assembly clockwise until seated.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
334
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:
1. Remove the center high-mounted stoplamp
(CHMSL) fasteners from the outside of the
vehicle.
2. Pull the CHMSL out of the liftgate.
3. Disconnect the rear washer hose from the
rear washer nozzle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from
the CHMSL.
5. Depress the tabs on the CHMSL lens to
separate the CHMSL bulb from the
CHMSL lens.
6. Pull the CHMSL bulb out of the assembly.
7. Replace the old bulb with a new one.
8. Align the tabs on the CHMSL lens with the
CHMSL bulb assembly, and push to install.
9. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the
CHMSL assembly.
335
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 106 for
more information.
2. Remove the two screws retaining the taillamp
assembly.
3. Slide the taillamp
assembly rearward
and away from
the vehicle.
5. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise to disconnect it.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
8. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall the
taillamp assembly.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and
remove it from the taillamp assembly.
336
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws holding each of
the license plate lamps to the fascia.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up
3156
CHMSL
W5W
Front Turn Signal/Parking
3157K
Headlamps
High-beam
9005 or HB3
Low-beam/DRL
9006 or HB4
Rear Turn Signal, Stoplamp and
Taillamp
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your retailer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
license plate lamp.
337
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 392 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 402.
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the
hook and push the wiper arm (A) out of the
blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the
wiper arm until you hear the release lever
click into place.
To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the steps
listed above.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly
do the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
338
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with
your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 264.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 345.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn,
or if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
(Continued)
339
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the Tire Size
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the
Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
340
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 352.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 345
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 264.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows, an example of,
a typical passenger car tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system.
The letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered
to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
341
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75,
as shown in item C, of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high
as it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission/
transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
342
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has
built up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 345.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 264.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 264.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 264.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
343
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 264.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 345 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 264.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 349.
344
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 352.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 264.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 264.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
345
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s
door latch. This label lists your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
shown on the label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the tire and loading information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 264. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they’re under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
346
High Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
strain on tires. Sustained high-speed
driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You
could have a crash and you or others
could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment
for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal,
set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum
inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or
35 psi (244 kPa), whichever is lower. See the
example following. When you end this high-speed
driving, return the tires to the cold inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 264.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)
300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation
pressure for high-speed driving at 35 psi (244 kPa)
for the front and rear tires.
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your
warranty booklet for more information.
347
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 349
and Wheel Replacement on page 353 for more
information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance” for additional information.
348
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 264, for an example of
the tire and loading information label and
its location on your vehicle.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
349
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS,
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 340 for additional information.
350
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information label. This
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 264,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information label.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use Saturn specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a
Saturn certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 350 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 287 for
additional information.
351
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and additional General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
352
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
353
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new Saturn original equipment parts. This way,
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
354
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire clearance to the body
and chassis.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt
from places where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the
wheel nuts might come loose and the
wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to become loose and even come off.
This could lead to a crash. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new Saturn
original equipment wheel nuts.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.
If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
Saturn original equipment wheel.
355
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P235/65R16, P235/60R17
or 245/50R18 size tires, do not use tire
chains, there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
CAUTION:
356
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it
for use on your vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions.
Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and
do not spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other
than P235/65R16, P235/60R17 or 245/50R18
size tires, use tire chains only where legal
and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class “S” type chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them on the
front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear
the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast
or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and
no place to store a tire.
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your tires
properly. See Tires on page 339. If air goes out
of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But, if you should ever have a blow out, here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering
wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,
and then gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
357
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blow out,
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Get the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very
bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place
and stopping. Then do this:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake
firmly and put the shift lever in PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 122
for additional information.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel or
has damaged sidewalls or large tears that
allow rapid air loss, call a tire repair facility.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 413.
358
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a
nail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit
may be used to repair the damaged tire
temporarily. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant to
seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.
After repairing a tire with the tire inflator kit,
take your vehicle to an authorized retailer to have
the tire inspected and repaired as soon as
possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair
only. See Tire Inflator Kit on page 358.
Tire Inflator Kit
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no jack
or spare tire. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant
and air at the same time to seal small punctures
in the tread area of the tire. Be sure to read
and follow all of the tire inflator kit instructions.
The kit includes the following:
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by
a nail or other similar road hazard, the tire
inflator kit can be used to temporarily repair the
damaged tire.
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire
inflator kit, it is recommended to take your
vehicle to an authorized retailer within 100 miles
(161 kilometers) of driving to have the tire
inspected and repaired. If the sealant is not
removed from the tire within 100 miles
(161 kilometers) of driving, it is more likely
that the tire may get damaged and have to be
replaced.
E. Air Pressure Gage
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister F. Air Compressor
C. Air Compressor
Inflator Hose
G. Sealant Filling
Accessory Plug
Hose
D. On/Off Switch
359
Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit
To access the tire inflator kit, do the following:
3. Remove the forward floor panel of the load
floor cargo organizer and place it in the vehicle
while you are removing the tire inflator kit.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 106
for more information
2. Lift the forward floor panel of the load floor
cargo organizer.
360
4. Open the floor cargo organizer locks, located
on the top left and right corners of the
organizer, by pushing inward on them.
5. Remove the load floor cargo organizer.
6. Remove the foam retainer bolt (B) holding
down the foam container.
7. Remove the foam container (C).
8. Remove the inflator kit (A) from its foam
container.
361
Tire Sealant
Using the Tire Inflator Kit
The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected
into a flat tire, might temporarily repair nail holes
or cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant
cannot repair tire damage caused while driving
on a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” or
a tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.
The tire sealant solution is to be used for a single
tire and can only be used once.
To use the tire inflator kit, do the following:
1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrap
the sealant filling hose from the compressor.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the
sealant canister. The sealant might not be
as effective beyond the expiration date. If needed,
see your retailer for a replacement canister.
362
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug
from the unit. To do this, pull the top portion
of the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,
and then unsnap the plug. Do not insert the
plug into an accessory outlet yet.
3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire
by turning it counterclockwise.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated
the tire, do not remove it.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or
with the climate control system off can
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).
See Engine Exhaust on page 125.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) on page 113
for more information. The vehicle must
be running while using the air compressor.
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire
valve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is in
the O (off) position.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)
into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 154
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed
36 psi (248 kPa).
363
7. Push the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.
The inflator kit forces sealant and air into the
tire. Sealant can leak from the puncture
hole until the vehicle is driven and the hole
has sealed.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection
between the tire valve stem and the
sealant filling hose by looking at the air
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure
reading while the compressor is running, the
connection between the inflator kit and
the tire is bad.
Check the attachment between the sealant
filling hose and the tire valve stem.
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended
inflation pressure, found on the Tire and
Loading Information label located on
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below the
vehicle’s door latch, using the air pressure
gage on the top of the unit.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high while
the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure reading.
364
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot
be reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. Damage to the
tire is severe and the sealant will not be
effective. Remove the air compressor plug
from the accessory power outlet and unscrew
the inflating hose from the tire valve. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 413 for
more information.
10. Push the inflator kit switch to the O (off)
position once the correct tire pressure is
obtained.
11. Turn off the engine.
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from
the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the
tire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,
and replace the tire valve stem cap.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they could be hot after usage.
14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back
in the air compressor. To do this, wrap the air
compressor accessory plug, snap in the
plug, and then push in the bottom and then
the top of the wrapped air compressor
accessory plug.
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended
inflation pressure,
remove the
maximum speed
label from the
sealant canister.
The maximum speed label reminds you to
drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until you have the damaged
tire inspected and repaired.
18. Return the equipment to the proper storage
location in the rear of your vehicle. To do
this, insert the tire inflator kit back into
the foam container and place the foam
container onto the storage bracket. Securely
tighten down the foam container with the
foam retainer bolt.
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other
equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire
inflator kit in the proper place.
19. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 under Accessing
the Tire Inflator Kit earlier in this section.
17. Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield
or to the face of the radio/clock.
365
20. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)
to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.
Stop at a safe location and check the
tire pressure, refer to Steps 1 through 8 under
Using the Air Compressor without Sealant
next in this section. If the tire pressure
has fallen more then 10 psi (68 kPa), below
the recommended inflation pressure, stop
driving the vehicle. The tire is too damaged for
the sealant to work. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 413 for more information.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended
inflation pressure, you can inflate the tire back
up to the recommended inflation pressure.
21. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local
retailer or in accordance with any local,
state, and provincial codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with
a new canister from a retailer.
22. After temporarily repairing a tire with the
emergency flat tire repair kit, take your
vehicle to an authorized retailer to have the
tire inspected and repaired.
366
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant
To use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire,
do the following:
1. Remove the air compressor accessory plug
from the air compressor.
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the
sealant canister by pulling up on the lever.
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
tire valve stem and push the lever down to
secure in place.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 154
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or
with the climate control system off can
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See
Engine Exhaust on page 125.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) on page 113
for more information. The vehicle must
be running while using the air compressor.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed
36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Push the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection
between the tire valve stem and the air
compressor hose by looking at the air
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure
reading while the compressor is running,
the connection between the inflator kit and the
tire is bad.
Check the attachment between the air
compressor hose and the tire valve stem.
367
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended
inflation pressure using the air pressure gage
on the top of the unit.
10. Turn off the air compressor by moving the
switch to the O (off) position.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other
equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire
inflator kit in the proper place.
11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and
wrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.
12. Place the equipment in the original location in
the trunk of your vehicle.
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose
from the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
368
To install a new sealant canister, do the following:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in
the air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator
filling hose is aligned with the slot in the
compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister.
See your retailer for more information.
369
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
370
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your retailer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
371
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
372
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 401.
373
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 374.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue
completely. You can get approved cleaning
products from your retailer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 378. Do not
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the
finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter your vehicle.
374
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved
cleaning products from your Saturn retailer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 378.
Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your
vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. You can help to
keep the paint finish looking new by keeping
your vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap, or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when
it is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean the
blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent.
Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
375
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use only
Saturn-approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
376
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through
an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage
the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair
shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your Saturn retailer or an underbody
car washing system can do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches
in the finish should be repaired right away.
Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your Saturn
retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body and
paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Saturn will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles
(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
377
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke, and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
378
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one easy step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
It appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
This label is on the rear edge of the driver side
rear door. It is very helpful if you ever need
to order parts. The label has the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
379
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the
power windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit
until the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 92.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.
This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of
the identical size and rating.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by
some electrical problem, have it fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has
the same amperage. Just pick some feature of
your vehicle that you can get along without,
like the radio or cigarette lighter, and use its fuse,
if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon
as you can.
380
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
IGN 1
LOCK/
MIRROR
BCM
BCM (IGN 1)
AIR BAG
RADIO (IGN)
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the lower console.
Usage
Instrument Cluster, Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock
Solenoid, Traction Switch, Fog
Lamp Switch
Power Door Locks, Power Mirror,
Entry Control
Body Control Module, Front Wipers,
Windows, Sunroof
Body Control Module
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Radio, Power Mirror, Premium
Radio Amplifier
TURN
Turn Lamps
HVAC
HVAC Control Head
HAZARD
Hazard Lamps
HTD SEATS
Heated Seats
Fuses
Usage
RADIO
Radio, Data Link Connector
CRUISE
Cruise Control Switch, Brake Switch
PARK
Park Lamps, Taillamps, Side Marker
Lamps, License Lamps
EPS
Electronic Power Steering
381
Fuses
BCM/
CLUSTER
Usage
Body Control Module, Instrument
Cluster
Main Underhood Fuse Block
INT LTS
Body Control Module, OnStar®
DR LKS
Door Locks
The main underhood fuse block is located under
the engine cover on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment. To access the fuse block, remove
the engine cover by pulling up on the cover
and lifting it off the engine. The main underhood
fuse block is the larger of the two fuse blocks
in the engine compartment. Remove the fuse block
cover for access to the fuses and relays. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 296 for
more information on its location. To remove fuses,
hold the end of the fuse between your thumb
and index finger and pull straight out.
Relays
Usage
AFTER BLOW Not Used
HVAC
BLOWER
PK LP
HVAC Control Head
Parking Lamps
DR LCK
All Door Lock Switch
PSG DR
UNLCK
Passenger Door Unlock Switch
DRV DR
UNLCK
Driver Door Unlock Switch
HDLP
382
Underhood Fuse Block
Headlamps
Fuses
ECM/TCM
BATT FEED
Usage
Battery Voltage to Engine Control
Module/Transaxle Control Module
Instrument Panel Fuse Box
Fuses
HORN
ABS PWR
EMISS
Usage
Horn
Anti-lock Brake System Battery
Emissions
383
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
COOL HI
Cooling Fan High
LH HDLP
Driver’s Side Headlamp
RR WIPER
ABS
IGN/INJ
PWR WDW
Rear Wiper
Anti-lock Brake System Module
Engine Ignition Module,
Fuel Injectors
Power Window Relay and Sunroof
Usage
PWR TRAIN
Engine Control Module, Transaxle
Control Module, Powertrain Control
Module
BACKUP
Low Coolant Switch, Back-up
Lamps, Vehicle Speed Sensor
(Manual), Transaxle Range Switch
HTD SEATS
Heated Seats
IGN
Ignition Switch
COOL LO
Cooling Fan Low
Cigarette Lighter
A/C CLUTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
HVAC
BLOWER
Climate Control System
Blower Motor
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
RH HDLP
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
CIGAR LITER
FRT WIPER
ETC
SUNROOF
BRAKE
384
Front Wiper
Electronic Throttle Control
Sunroof Module
Stoplamps
AUX OUTLETS Auxiliary Power Outlets
ESCM/CANV
Electric Storage Control Module
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System Ignition
PWR SEAT
Power Seats
Relays
DRL
HORN
COOL FAN HI
ENG MAIN
Usage
Usage
Daytime Running Lamps Relay
A/C CLUTCH
Horn Relay
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump System Relay
RR WIPER
Rear Wiper System Relay
Cooling Fan High Relay
Engine Control Module/CAM,
Emissions, Injectors, Electronic
Throttle Control Relay
REAR DEFOG Rear Defog System Relay
WIPER
SYSTEM
Relays
Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
Misc.
Usage
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
A/C DIODE
Air Conditioning Diode
Wiper System Relay
PWR WDW
Power Window Switch, Sunroof
Module Relay
FRT WIPER
Front Wiper System Relay
COOL FAN
LOW
Cooling Fan Low Relay
385
Hybrid Underhood Fuse Block
The hybrid underhood fuse block is located under
the engine cover on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment. To access the fuse block,
remove the engine cover by pulling up on the
cover and lifting it off the engine. The hybrid
underhood fuse block is the smaller of the two fuse
blocks in the engine compartment, and is located
near the front of the vehicle.
Fuses
PUMPS
HILL HOLD
Usage
Coolant Pumps (2)
Hill Hold Valves
TRANS PUMP Transaxle Pump
STRTR
Starter Motor
Relays
Usage
HILL HOLD
Hill Hold Valves
TRANS PUMP Transaxle Pump
STRTR
Starter Motor
386
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label
located under the hood. See your retailer for
more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
9.3 qt
8.8 L
Engine Oil with Filter
5.0 qt
4.7 L
16.6 gal
62.8 L
7.0 qt
6.6 L
100 ft lb
140 Y
Fuel Tank
Transaxle (Bottom Pan Removal)
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4
5
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
387
✍ NOTES
388
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 390
Introduction ............................................... 390
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 390
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 390
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 390
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 392
Additional Required Services ..................... 395
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 396
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 397
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 398
At Least Once a Month ............................. 398
At Least Once a Year ............................... 398
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 401
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ................................. 402
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 403
Maintenance Record .................................. 404
389
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
390
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle in
good working condition. But we do not know exactly
how you will drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making
deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you
have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in
good condition, see your Saturn retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 264.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 289.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 392 should be performed when indicated.
See Additional Required Services on page 395 and
Maintenance Footnotes on page 396 for further
information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, see your retailer to
have a qualified technician do the work.
See Doing Your Own Service Work on
page 288.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have
your Saturn retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your
service needs, you will know that Saturn-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine Saturn parts.
391
If you want to purchase service information, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 423.
Owner Checks and Services on page 397 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 401 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 402.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine Saturn parts.
392
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil light comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your Saturn retailer has
Saturn-trained service technicians who will perform
this work using genuine Saturn parts and reset
the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 300 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
When the Change Engine Oil light appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service
be Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
Change Engine Oil light comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the light
comes on 10 months or more since the last service
or if the light has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 297. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 300. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 302. See footnote (l).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 348 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 398.
•
•
•
393
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
•
394
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 302.
Change automatic transaxle fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid
(normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
25,000
(40 000)
•
50,000
(80 000)
•
75,000
(120 000)
•
100,000
(160 000)
•
125,000
(200 000)
•
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
395
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes
for wear or cracks. Inspect other brake parts,
including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking
brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with
genuine Saturn parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
396
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If you see anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have
any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look
for any opened or broken airbag coverings, and
have them repaired or replaced. The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges
and latches, hood hinges and latches, glove box
hinges, sunroof (if equipped), and any folding
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) Check system for interference or binding
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that
have high effort or excessive wear.
(h) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.
This service can be complex; you should have
your retailer perform this service. See Engine
Coolant on page 306 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if
needed.
(k) Or every 12 months, whichever occurs first. If
you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
the safety, dependability, and emission control
performance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailer
can assist you with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 401.
397
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 297 for
further details.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper
level can cause damage to the engine not
covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
See Engine Coolant on page 306 for further
details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
398
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and
make sure they are inflated to the correct
pressures. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 345.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 121.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear.
The vehicle should start only in PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your Saturn retailer
for service.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 121.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your Saturn retailer for service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
399
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.
400
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 297.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 306.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Optikleen® Washer Solvent
Washer
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12377985,
Parking Brake in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and Release
Pawl
Hood, Liftgate
Door, and
Rear Folding
Seat Hinges
Sunroof Track
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
401
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from
your retailer.
Saturn Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
22676970
A1627C
12605566
PF457G
15822812
—
1258004
41-103
Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm)
22703508
—
Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm)
22703507
—
Rear – 11.0 inches (28.0 cm)
22665007
—
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4
Wiper Blades
402
Engine Drive Belt Routing
The engine drive belt on this hybrid vehicle is
under a higher tension than the engine drive belt
on a non-hybrid vehicle and requires the use
of a special kind of tool. See your retailer
for service.
403
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 390.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 397 can be added on the following
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
404
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
405
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
406
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 408
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 408
Online Owner Center ................................. 411
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 412
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 412
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 413
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 413
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders ............................ 417
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 418
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 422
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 422
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 422
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ............ 423
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 423
407
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are
committed to providing our customers with
unparalleled service, before, during and after the
purchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customer
satisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.
Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction
or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved
by your retailer’s sales or service departments.
If, for any reason, your ownership experience falls
below your expectations, we suggest you take
the following action:
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer
Assistance Liaison. Any member of the retail
management team has the authority and the desire
to resolve your concerns. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at this level.
408
STEP TWO: Should you need additional
assistance, in the U.S., contact the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the
Saturn Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance
Center team member will handle your call and
assist in providing product and warranty
information, the nearest retailer location, roadside
assistance, brochures, literature and discuss
any concerns you may have.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
This 17-digit number can be found on the
vehicle registration or title, on the upper
driver’s side corner of the dash, or on your
roadside assistance key card.
• The name of your selling and servicing
retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and
its retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the
additional assistance of a neutral party through
our voluntary participation in a mediation/arbitration
program called Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program
is available at no cost to you, our customer.
Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard
within 40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available
to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program
by using the toll-free telephone number or
by writing them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited
by vehicle age, mileage and other factors.
Saturn Corporation reserves the right to change
eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
409
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns
have been addressed after following the procedure
outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire
dispute settlement process, from the time you file
your complaint to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
410
For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or
you may write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
411
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties,
Saturn has installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance
Center.
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or to a conventional
Text Telephone (TTY) can communicate with
Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in
Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.
Customer Assistance Offices
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write
to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
412
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada may
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call
1-800-553-6000 (TTY: 1-800-833-6000).
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible
aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require for your vehicle such
as hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
The offer is available for a limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the
Saturn Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-6000.
For vehicles purchased in Canada call
1-800-268-6800.
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year
As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you
are automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
413
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres
in Canada). Service to provide diesel may be
restricted. For safety reasons, propane
and other alternative fuels will not be provided
through this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration
and personal ID before lock-out service
is provided. Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. If you vehicle will not
start, Roadside Assistance will arrange to have
your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized
retailer. In the U.S., replacement keys made at
the customer’s expense will be delivered
within 10 miles.
414
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance provided when the vehicle is mired
in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a spare
time, installation of that tire, in good condition,
will be covered at no charge. The customer
is responsible for the repair or replacement of
the tire if not covered by a warrantable
failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start will be covered at
no charge.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as
possible, but it is best to allow three weeks
before your planned departure date.
Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense you
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
• Alternative Service: There may be times when
Roadside Assistance cannot provide timely
assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you
will be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission
of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are
covered under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty for U.S. customers, and the duration of
the Base Warranty Coverage for Canadian
customers of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
However, any cost for parts and labor for
non-warranty repairs are the responsibility of
the driver.
415
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representatives:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember we are only
a phone call away. Saturn Roadside Assistance:
1-800-553-6000 ; text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-6000. Canadian customers
call 1-800-268-6800.
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains or other traction devices.
416
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program
at any time without notification.
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has
a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if the vehicle has the
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in
difficult driving situations. Some information may be
stored during regular operations to facilitate repair
of detected malfunctions; other information is
stored only in a crash event by computer systems,
such as those commonly called Event Data
Recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information
has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving
safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record
sounds, such as conversation of vehicle
occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
417
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
Collision Damage Repair
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or owner
manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an
acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
418
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center that
has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
419
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident
until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it
by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 413 for more
information.
420
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you
keep these items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and policy
number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If they
ask for a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.
In some states/provinces with “no fault”
insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries
and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a Saturn
retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix
the damage, make sure you are comfortable
with them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that
any required replacement collision parts be original
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is
leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control of the repair
and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
421
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your retailer
or Saturn Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
422
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you will notify us.
U.S. customers can call the Saturn Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999.
Or, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
A variety of publications are available to you.
Saturn service manuals are written for trained
technicians, and in some cases, specialized tools
and equipment are necessary to complete
certain repairs. However, the manuals are
available to owners who either have the training,
or wish to gain a greater understanding of the
technical aspect of their Saturn.
For additional publications information or to order
publications in the United States, call toll free
1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available
by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
423
Owner Publications
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and
as described below is applicable only in the fifty
U.S. states and the District of Columbia, and only
for cars and light trucks with a Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds
(4 536 kg). Copies of individual bulletins are
also at your participating Saturn retailer. You can
ask to see them.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors
product performance in the field. We then prepare
bulletins for servicing our products better.
You can get these bulletins, too.
424
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to
the proper use and care of your vehicle. Some
describe costly repairs. Others describe
inexpensive repairs which, if done on time with the
latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a
new or unexpected condition. Others describe a
quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help
a technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a
qualified technician may have to determine if a
specific bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order
Saturn bulletins, call Saturn Publications at
1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 287
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 154
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 93
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 290
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 380
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 302
Air Conditioning ........................................... 156
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 166
Readiness Light ....................................... 165
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module
(SDM) ...................................................... 417
Airbag System ............................................... 75
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 93
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 83
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 86
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 92
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 83
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 84
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 81
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 78
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 229
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System .......................................
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .......
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ....................................
Care of Safety Belts ................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...........................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ..............
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ..........
Fabric/Carpet ...........................................
Finish Care ..............................................
Finish Damage .........................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...............................
Tires ........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...........................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................
Audio System(s) ..........................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ...................
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................
229
238
170
376
373
377
374
370
372
374
377
373
377
376
377
378
374
373
375
184
227
229
229
229
425
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Radio with CD ................................ 188,
Radio with CD and DVD ..........................
Setting the Time ......................................
Understanding Radio Reception ...............
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......
Auto Stop Mode ..........................................
Automatic Headlamp System .......................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ........................................................
Operation .................................................
195
205
186
228
229
181
153
305
118
B
Battery ........................................................
Run-Down Protection ...............................
Battery Warning Light ..................................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................
Emergencies ............................................
Parking ....................................................
System Warning Light ..............................
Brakes ........................................................
Regenerative Braking ...............................
Braking .......................................................
Braking in Emergencies ...............................
426
321
154
168
253
238
240
121
169
318
121
237
240
Break-In, New Vehicle .................................
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...............................
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ......
Halogen Bulbs .........................................
Headlamp Aiming .....................................
Headlamps ...............................................
License Plate Lamps ................................
Replacement Bulbs ..................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .....................................
Buying New Tires ........................................
111
331
335
334
331
328
331
337
337
336
350
C
Calibration ................................................... 127
California Fuel ............................................. 290
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 288
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 387
Carbon Monoxide .............. 106, 125, 257, 274
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 373
Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 229
Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 229
Cargo Area ................................................. 135
Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 137
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 205
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 135
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) .................................. 335
Chains, Tire ................................................. 356
Charge/Assist Gage ..................................... 182
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 173
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 294
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 377
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 51
Infants and Young Children ........................ 47
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ....... 58
Older Children ........................................... 44
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .................... 64
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ...................... 67
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ........................ 69
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 56
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 155
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 376
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 374
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 372
Finish Care .............................................. 374
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 370
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 373
Tires ........................................................ 376
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 377
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 374
Weatherstrips ........................................... 373
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 375
Climate Control System ............................... 156
Clock .......................................................... 186
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 418
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 40
Compass ..................................................... 127
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 109
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 237
Coolant
Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 172
Heater, Engine ......................................... 116
Low Warning Light ................................... 172
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 309
Cooling System ........................................... 311
427
Cruise Control .............................................
Cupholder(s) ................................................
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .........................
Customer Assistance Offices ....................
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..............
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ......
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ..........
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
148
134
412
412
408
413
423
422
422
413
423
D
Daytime Running Lamps .............................
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light .......
Defensive Driving ........................................
Delayed Locking ..........................................
Disc, MP3 ...................................................
Doing Your Own Service Work ....................
428
152
179
233
104
205
288
Dome Lamp ................................................ 154
Door
Delayed Locking ...................................... 104
Locks ....................................................... 103
Power Door Locks ................................... 104
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 104
Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 105
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 26
Seat Height Adjuster .................................. 10
Driver Behavior ........................................... 232
Driving
At Night ................................................... 247
City .......................................................... 251
Defensive ................................................. 233
Drunken ................................................... 234
Environment ............................................. 232
Freeway ................................................... 252
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 255
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 248
Recovery Hook ........................................ 262
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 262
Winter ...................................................... 257
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 214
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...........................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................
Battery .....................................................
Change Engine Oil Light ..........................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light .......
Coolant ....................................................
Coolant Heater .........................................
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ..........
Drive Belt Routing ....................................
Engine Compartment Overview ................
Exhaust ...................................................
Oil ...........................................................
Oil Life System ........................................
Overheating .............................................
Reduced Power Light ...............................
Starting ....................................................
380
380
381
380
382
380
302
321
177
173
306
116
172
403
296
125
297
300
309
178
113
Entry Lighting .............................................. 154
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 417
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 43
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 302
Finish Damage ............................................ 377
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 229
Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 144
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 146
Flat Tire ...................................................... 357
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ................................. 305
Windshield Washer .................................. 317
Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 19
Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 16
Front Console Storage Area ........................ 135
Fuel ............................................................ 289
Additives .................................................. 290
California Fuel .......................................... 290
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 294
Filling Your Tank ...................................... 292
Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 291
429
Fuel (cont.)
Gage .......................................................
Gasoline Octane ......................................
Gasoline Specifications ............................
Low Warning Light ...................................
Fuel Economy Light ....................................
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Windshield Wiper .....................................
180
289
289
181
183
380
381
382
380
G
Gage
Fuel .........................................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Tachometer ..............................................
Gage, Charge/Assist ....................................
Garment Hooks ...........................................
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
Gate Ajar Light ............................................
Glove Box ...................................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
430
180
163
163
182
135
289
289
179
134
413
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 144
Head Restraints ............................................ 15
Headlamp
Aiming ..................................................... 328
Headlamps ......................................... 151, 331
Automatic Headlamp System .................... 153
Bulb Replacement .................................... 331
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 152
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 146
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ...... 334
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 331
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 146
Heated Seats ................................................ 11
Heater ......................................................... 156
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat .......................... 10
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 178
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 254
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 255
Hill Start Assist Light ................................... 183
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 294
Release ................................................... 295
Hood Ajar Light ........................................... 184
Horn ............................................................ 144
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 26
I
Ignition Positions ......................................... 111
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 47
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 345
Inflator Kit, Tire ........................................... 358
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 142
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 153
Cluster ..................................................... 162
Interior Lamps ............................................. 153
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 322
K
Keyless Entry System ................................... 99
Keys ............................................................. 98
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 340
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 154
Dome ....................................................... 154
Interior ..................................................... 153
Map ......................................................... 154
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 58
License Plate Lamps ................................... 337
Liftgate ........................................................ 106
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 165
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 170
Battery Warning ....................................... 168
Brake System Warning ............................. 169
Change Engine Oil ................................... 177
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 179
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 172
Fuel Economy .......................................... 183
Gate Ajar ................................................. 179
Highbeam On .......................................... 178
Hill Start Assist ........................................ 183
Hood Ajar ................................................ 184
Low Coolant Warning ............................... 172
431
Light (cont.)
Low Fuel Warning ....................................
Low Traction ............................................
Malfunction Indicator ................................
Oil Pressure .............................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder ..............
Reduced Engine Power ............................
Safety Belt Reminder ...............................
Security ...................................................
TCS Warning Light ..................................
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning ................................................
Light, Auto Stop Mode .................................
Lighting
Entry ........................................................
Loading Your Vehicle ...................................
Lockout Protection .......................................
Locks
Delayed Locking ......................................
Door ........................................................
Lockout Protection ...................................
Power Door .............................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......
Rear Door Security Locks ........................
Loss of Control ...........................................
Low Coolant Warning Light ..........................
432
181
171
173
176
166
164
178
164
177
171
171
181
154
264
106
104
103
106
104
104
105
246
172
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 181
Low Traction Light ....................................... 171
Lumbar
Manual Controls ......................................... 11
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services .................... 395
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 398
At Least Once a Month ............................ 398
At Least Once a Year .............................. 398
Introduction .............................................. 390
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 396
Maintenance Record ................................ 404
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 390
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ............................... 402
Owner Checks and Services .................... 397
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 401
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 392
Using ....................................................... 390
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 390
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 173
Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 11
Manual Reclining Seatbacks .......................... 12
Manual Seats .................................................. 9
Map Lamps .................................................
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display .................................................
Outside Convex Mirror .............................
Outside Power Mirrors .............................
MP3 ............................................................
MyGMLink.com ............................................
154
127
130
130
205
411
N
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 111
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 402
O
Odometer .................................................... 163
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 163
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 244
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 177
Engine ..................................................... 297
Pressure Light .......................................... 176
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 300
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 44
Online Owner Center ................................... 411
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 131
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 154
Outside
Convex Mirror .......................................... 130
Power Mirrors .......................................... 130
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 397
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 377
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 122
Shifting Out of ......................................... 123
Parking
Brake ....................................................... 121
Over Things That Burn ............................ 124
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 166
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 86
Passing ....................................................... 244
Passlock® .................................................... 110
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 154
Door Locks .............................................. 104
Electrical System ..................................... 380
433
Power (cont.)
Reduced Engine Light .............................. 178
Seat .......................................................... 10
Windows .................................................. 108
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 43
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 104
Q
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................... 25
R
Radios ........................................................ 184
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 229
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 229
Radio with CD ................................ 188, 195
Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 205
Setting the Time ...................................... 186
Understanding Reception ......................... 228
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 105
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 40
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 214
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 37
434
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 148
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ..................................................... 127
Reclining Seatbacks, Manual ......................... 12
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 401
Recovery Hook ............................................ 262
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 270
Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 178
Regenerative Braking .................................. 121
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 99
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ................................................. 100
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 337
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 422
Saturn ...................................................... 423
United States Government ....................... 422
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 94
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 95
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 36
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 413
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 262
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 403
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 126
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 164
Pretensioners ............................................. 43
Reminder Light ........................................ 164
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 373
Driver Position ........................................... 26
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 26
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................ 25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 40
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 37
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 36
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 43
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 36
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 35
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 392
Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 16
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................ 10
Head Restraints ......................................... 15
Heated Seats ............................................. 11
Manual ........................................................ 9
Manual Lumbar .......................................... 11
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ...................... 12
Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 16
Power Seat ................................................ 10
Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 19
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 67
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 64
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 69
Security Light .............................................. 177
Service ........................................................ 287
Accessories and Modifications .................. 287
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ......................................... 289
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 288
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 288
Engine Soon Light ................................... 173
Publications Ordering Information ............. 423
435
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 92
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 377
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 122
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 123
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 35
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 145
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 387
Speedometer ............................................... 163
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 19
Starting Your Engine ................................... 113
Steering ...................................................... 241
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 227
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 144
Storage
Garment Hooks ........................................ 135
Storage Areas
Cargo Area .............................................. 135
Center Console Storage Area ................... 135
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 134
Floor Console Storage Area ..................... 135
Glove Box ................................................ 134
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 261
Sun Visors .................................................. 108
Sunroof ....................................................... 137
436
T
Tachometer .................................................
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .....................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................
Passlock® ................................................
Tilt Wheel ....................................................
Time, Setting ...............................................
Tires ...........................................................
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .....................
Buying New Tires .....................................
Chains .....................................................
Cleaning ..................................................
Different Size ...........................................
If a Tire Goes Flat ...................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................
Inspection and Rotation ............................
Tire Inflator Kit .........................................
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..............................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................
163
336
171
109
109
110
144
186
339
376
350
356
376
351
357
345
348
358
340
342
352
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
Wheel Replacement .................................
When It Is Time for New Tires .................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
Traction
Control System (TCS) ..............................
Control System Warning Light ..................
Low Light .................................................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ...................
Trip Odometer .............................................
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
353
353
349
270
274
270
240
171
171
305
118
163
145
145
U
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 228
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 352
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 237
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Design ..................................................... 232
Loading .................................................... 264
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ........................................ 417
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 379
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 379
Visors .......................................................... 108
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 161
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 144
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 353
Different Size ........................................... 351
Replacement ............................................ 353
437
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 56
Windows ..................................................... 107
Power ...................................................... 108
Windshield
Washer .................................................... 147
Washer Fluid ........................................... 317
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 338
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 375
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 380
Wipers ..................................................... 146
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 148
Winter Driving ............................................. 257
438
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 212
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 229
Y
Your Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle ..... 232
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 390
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement